Top Banner
OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System V100R005C00 Commissioning Guide Issue 03 Date 2010-05-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
221
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemV100R005C00

Commissioning Guide

Issue 03

Date 2010-05-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)
Page 3: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 4: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)
Page 5: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

About This Document

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX RTN 620 V100R005C00

iManager U2000 V100R002C00

Intended AudienceThis manual provides the on-site commissioning methods of the OptiX RTN 620. Thecommissioning items and procedure in the case of the NE commissioning and the HOPcommissioning are described respectively.

The intended audience of this document are:

Installation and Commissioning Engineer.

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,which if not avoided, will result in death orserious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low levelof risk, which if not avoided, could result inminor or moderate injury.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 6: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,which if not avoided, could result inequipment damage, data loss, performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve aproblem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasizeor supplement important points of the maintext.

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the third release for the V100R005C00 product version.

Compared with the second release, the updated contents are as follows:

Update Description

4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU Fixes the default password of the Web LCT.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the second release for the V100R005C00 product version.

Compared with the first release, the updated contents are as follows:

About This DocumentOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 7: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Update Description

- Fixes known bugs.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00This document is the first release of the V100R005C00 version.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide About This Document

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 8: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)
Page 9: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Safety Precautions......................................................................................................................1-11.1 General Safety Precautions.............................................................................................................................1-11.2 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................1-31.3 Flammable Air Environment...........................................................................................................................1-51.4 Radiation.........................................................................................................................................................1-51.5 Working at Heights.........................................................................................................................................1-71.6 Mechanical Safety.........................................................................................................................................1-101.7 Other Precautions..........................................................................................................................................1-11

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations............................................................................................2-12.1 Operation Guide to a Toggle Lever Switch.....................................................................................................2-22.2 Operation Guide to IF Jumpers.......................................................................................................................2-32.3 Operation Guide to IF Cables..........................................................................................................................2-42.4 Operation Guide to IF Boards.........................................................................................................................2-5

3 Commissioning Preparations...................................................................................................3-13.1 Commissioning Items......................................................................................................................................3-2

3.1.1 Site Commissioning Items.....................................................................................................................3-23.1.2 System Commissioning Items................................................................................................................3-4

3.2 Documents and Tools Preparation..................................................................................................................3-63.3 Checking Commissioning Conditions.............................................................................................................3-7

3.3.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions............................................................................................3-73.3.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions.......................................................................................3-7

4 Site Commissioning Guide......................................................................................................4-14.1 Powering On the Equipment...........................................................................................................................4-24.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCT.....................................................................4-5

4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDU..................................................................................................4-114.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.........................................................................................4-124.2.3 Logging In to an NE.............................................................................................................................4-144.2.4 Changing NE IDs.................................................................................................................................4-164.2.5 Changing NE Names............................................................................................................................4-174.2.6 Setting NE Communication Parameters...............................................................................................4-174.2.7 Configuring Logical Boards.................................................................................................................4-19

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide Contents

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 10: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................4-204.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................4-244.2.10 Synchronizing NE Time.....................................................................................................................4-294.2.11 Configuring the Orderwire.................................................................................................................4-304.2.12 Checking Alarms................................................................................................................................4-33

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data with a Hand-Held Tool...................................................................4-344.3.1 Connecting Hand-Held Tools to IDUs.................................................................................................4-344.3.2 Set NE Attributes.................................................................................................................................4-364.3.3 Configuring a Radio Link....................................................................................................................4-384.3.4 Checking Alarms..................................................................................................................................4-41

4.4 Testing Connectivity of Cables.....................................................................................................................4-424.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables (by Using the Web LCT).............................................................4-424.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables with a Hand-Held Tool................................................................4-444.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Ethernet Cables.............................................................................................4-454.4.4 Testing Connectivity of Fiber Jumpers................................................................................................4-46

4.5 Aligning Antennas.........................................................................................................................................4-484.5.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobe....................................................................................................................4-484.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas....................................................................................................4-514.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized Antennas......................................................................................................4-54

4.6 Querying the Status of Radio Links..............................................................................................................4-564.7 Querying DCN Status....................................................................................................................................4-57

5 System Commissioning Guide................................................................................................5-15.1 Configuring the Network-Wide Service Data.................................................................................................5-2

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method...........................................................................................5-25.1.2 Logging In to an NE...............................................................................................................................5-45.1.3 Changing NE IDs...................................................................................................................................5-65.1.4 Changing NE Names..............................................................................................................................5-75.1.5 Setting NE Communication Parameters.................................................................................................5-85.1.6 Configuring Logical Boards...................................................................................................................5-95.1.7 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................5-105.1.8 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................5-145.1.9 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services .....................................................................5-195.1.10 Configuring Clock Sources................................................................................................................5-225.1.11 Configuring the Orderwire.................................................................................................................5-24

5.2 Testing E1 Services.......................................................................................................................................5-275.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester........................................................................................5-285.2.2 Testing E1 Services Through PRBS....................................................................................................5-29

5.3 Testing Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................................5-315.3.1 Testing Ethernet Services by Using the LB Function..........................................................................5-315.3.2 Testing Ethernet Services by Using the Ping Function........................................................................5-325.3.3 Testing Ethernet Services by Using Laptops.......................................................................................5-34

5.4 Testing AM Switching..................................................................................................................................5-36

ContentsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 11: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

5.4.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester...................................................................................5-365.4.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester.....................................................................................5-38

5.5 Testing Protection Switching........................................................................................................................5-405.5.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching.....................................................................................................................5-415.5.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching.......................................................................................................5-445.5.3 Testing SNCP Switching......................................................................................................................5-465.5.4 Testing ERPS.......................................................................................................................................5-495.5.5 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP Switching................................................................................5-515.5.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching............................................................................................................5-55

5.6 Checking the Clock Status............................................................................................................................5-585.7 Testing the 24-Hour BER..............................................................................................................................5-59

6 Introduction to a Hand-Held Tool..........................................................................................6-16.1 Functions and Features....................................................................................................................................6-26.2 Operation Interface..........................................................................................................................................6-2

7 Configuration Example of Service Data................................................................................7-17.1 Networking Diagram.......................................................................................................................................7-27.2 Board Configurations......................................................................................................................................7-27.3 Service Planning..............................................................................................................................................7-37.4 Configuration Process.....................................................................................................................................7-5

8 Task Collection...........................................................................................................................8-18.1 Creating MDs..................................................................................................................................................8-28.2 Creating MAs..................................................................................................................................................8-38.3 Creating MPs...................................................................................................................................................8-58.4 Setting the Automatic Release Function.........................................................................................................8-88.5 Configuring External Ethernet Ports...............................................................................................................8-8

A Glossary.....................................................................................................................................A-1A.1 0-9..................................................................................................................................................................A-2A.2 A-E................................................................................................................................................................A-2A.3 F-J................................................................................................................................................................A-11A.4 K-O..............................................................................................................................................................A-16A.5 P-T...............................................................................................................................................................A-22A.6 U-Z..............................................................................................................................................................A-30

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide Contents

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 12: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)
Page 13: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figures

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap............................................................................................................... 1-5Figure 1-2 Weight lifting......................................................................................................................................1-8Figure 1-3 Schematic diagram of slanting a ladder..............................................................................................1-9Figure 1-4 Schematic diagram of the ladder one meter higher than the eave......................................................1-9Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch............................................................................................................................ 2-2Figure 4-1 Normal state........................................................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-2 Normal state........................................................................................................................................4-5Figure 4-3 Connecting hand-held tools to IDUs................................................................................................4-35Figure 4-4 Connecting the BER tester...............................................................................................................4-43Figure 4-5 Testing the Ethernet cable................................................................................................................4-46Figure 4-6 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of fiber jumpers by using an optical interface board.............................................................................................................................................................................4-47Figure 4-7 Main lobe and side lobe....................................................................................................................4-49Figure 4-8 Horizontal section of the antenna.....................................................................................................4-50Figure 4-9 Three tracking paths.........................................................................................................................4-50Figure 4-10 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe..................................................................................4-51Figure 4-11 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter............................................................................4-53Figure 4-12 HOP Management..........................................................................................................................4-58Figure 5-1 Connecting the BER Tester..............................................................................................................5-28Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services...........................................................................5-31Figure 5-3 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services...........................................................................5-33Figure 5-4 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services...........................................................................5-35Figure 5-5 Configuration for testing the linear MSP switching.........................................................................5-41Figure 5-6 Configuration for testing the N+1 protection switching...................................................................5-44Figure 5-7 Networking diagram.........................................................................................................................5-47Figure 5-8 Networking diagram for testing ERPS.............................................................................................5-50Figure 5-9 Two-fiber bidirectional MSP switching...........................................................................................5-52Figure 5-10 Configuration for testing the linear MSP switching.......................................................................5-56Figure 6-1 Exterior and key arrangement of type I hand-held tool......................................................................6-3Figure 6-2 Exterior and key arrangement of type II hand-held tool.....................................................................6-3Figure 7-1 Networking diagram...........................................................................................................................7-2Figure 7-2 Board configuration diagram..............................................................................................................7-2Figure 7-3 Timeslot allocation diagram...............................................................................................................7-4

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide Figures

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 14: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)
Page 15: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Tables

Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT.............................................................3-2Table 3-2 Configuring site commissioning data by using a hand-held tool.........................................................3-4Table 3-3 System commissioning items...............................................................................................................3-5Table 3-4 List of tools and meters........................................................................................................................3-6Table 4-1 Fuse current..........................................................................................................................................4-2Table 4-2 States of indicators...............................................................................................................................4-4Table 4-3 Procedure for configuring NEs............................................................................................................4-6Table 4-4 Procedure for configuring NEs............................................................................................................4-8Table 4-5 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................4-15Table 4-6 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................4-16Table 4-7 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................4-18Table 4-8 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................4-22Table 4-9 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................4-25Table 4-10 Parameters........................................................................................................................................4-32Table 5-1 Parameters............................................................................................................................................5-5Table 5-2 Parameters............................................................................................................................................5-7Table 5-3 Parameters............................................................................................................................................5-9Table 5-4 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................5-12Table 5-5 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................5-15Table 5-6 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................5-20Table 5-7 Parameters..........................................................................................................................................5-26Table 7-1 Planning information about radio links................................................................................................7-3Table 7-2 Information about IF boards.................................................................................................................7-4Table 7-3 Clock and orderwire information ........................................................................................................7-5Table 8-1 Parameters............................................................................................................................................8-3Table 8-2 Parameters............................................................................................................................................8-4Table 8-3 Parameters............................................................................................................................................8-6Table 8-4 Parameters for the basic attributes.....................................................................................................8-10Table 8-5 Parameters for flow control................................................................................................................8-12Table 8-6 Parameters for the TAG attributes.....................................................................................................8-13Table 8-7 Parameters for the network attributes.................................................................................................8-14Table 8-8 Parameters for the advanced attributes...............................................................................................8-14Table 8-9 Methods used by ports to process data frames...................................................................................8-15

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide Tables

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

Page 16: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)
Page 17: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety PrecautionsThe general safety precautions include parts of the safety precautions. Read and follow thesesafety precautions before installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment. This topic alsoprovides guidelines on how to select the appropriate measuring instruments and test devices.

Specific Safety PrecautionsBefore installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment, read through the instructions andprecautions carefully to minimize the possibility of accidents. The Danger, Caution, Warning,and Note items in this document do not cover all the safety precautions that must be followed.They are only parts of the safety precautions as a whole.

Symbols

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided, could result in death or seriousinjury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk that, if not avoided, could result in minoror moderate injury.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

Page 18: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage,data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results.

NOTE

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

Local Rules and Regulations

When operating the equipment, you must obey the local rules and regulations. The safetyprecautions provided in this document are supplementary and should be in compliance with thelocal safety regulations.

Basic Requirements for Installation

The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei equipment must receive strict trainingand be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.

l Only the qualified and skilled personnel are allowed to install, operate, and maintain theequipment.

l Only the certified professionals are allowed to remove the safety facilities, and totroubleshoot and maintain the equipment.

l Any replacement or change of the equipment or parts of the equipment (including thesoftware) must be performed by the certified or authorized personnel of Huawei.

l Any fault or error that may cause a safety problem must be reported immediately to theperson in charge.

Grounding Requirements

The grounding requirements are applicable to the equipment that needs to be grounded.

l When installing the equipment, always connect the grounding facilities first. Whenremoving the equipment, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.

l Do not damage the grounding conductor.

l Do not operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.

l The equipment should be connected to the protection ground permanently. Before operatingthe equipment, check the electrical connections of the equipment, and ensure that theequipment is properly grounded.

Human Safetyl Do not operate the equipment and cables in the case of lightning.

l To avoid electric shocks, do not connect the safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits tothe telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.

l To prevent laser radiation from injuring your eyes, do not look at the optical port directly.

1 Safety PrecautionsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 19: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

l Before operating the equipment, put on the electrostatic discharge (ESD) work uniforms,wear ESD gloves or an ESD wrist strap, and take off metallic articles, such as watch,bracelet, and ring, to prevent electric stock or injury of the human body.

l In the case of fire, keep away from the building or the area where the equipment is locatedand press the fire alarm system or dial the phone number for a fire call. In this case, do notenter the building which is on fire.

Equipment Safetyl Before operation, install the equipment firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as

a wall or a rack.l When the system is operating, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.

l When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly.

l After installing the equipment, clean up the packing materials.

1.2 Electrical Safety

High Voltage

DANGERl The high-voltage power supply provides the power for the equipment. Direct or indirect

contact of high voltage and mains supply through damp objects may result in fatal danger.l Non-standard and improper high-voltage operations may result in certain accidents such as

fire or electric shock.

l The personnel who perform high-voltage operations must be certified for high-voltage andAC operations.

l The AC cables must be bridged and routed according to the local rules and regulations.

l When operating AC power supply facilities, obey the local rules and regulations.

l When performing high-voltage and AC operations, use special tools rather than generaltools.

l When performing operations in a damp environment, ensure that the equipment is keptaway from water. Switch off the power supply immediately if you find any water in therack or if the rack is damp.

Thunderstorm

DANGERDo not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, iron tower, or backstay in stormy weatherconditions.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

Page 20: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Power Cable

CAUTIONDo not install or remove the power cable with the power on. Transient contact between the coreof the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fireor injury to the eye.

l Before installing or removing the power cable, switch off the power supply.

l Before connecting the power cable, ensure that the power cable and label conform to therequirements for the installation.

Fuse

CAUTIONIf the fuse on the equipment blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specificationsto ensure safe operation of the equipment.

Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTIONThe static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic sensitivecomponents on the board, such as the large-scale integrated circuit (LSI).

l The human body generates a static electromagnetic field in the following situations: movingof the human body, friction of the clothes, friction between shoes and the ground, andholding ordinary plastic in hand. The static electromagnetic field will remain within thehuman body for a long time.

l Before operating the equipment, parts, circuit boards, or ASICs, wear an ESD wrist strapthat is properly grounded. The ESD wrist strap can prevent the electrostatic-sensitivecomponents from being damaged by the static electricity in the human body.

Figure 1-1 shows the method of wearing an ESD wrist strap.

1 Safety PrecautionsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

1-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 21: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

1.3 Flammable Air Environment

DANGERDo not place or operate the equipment in an environment where flammable gas, explosive gas,or smog exists.

Operations on any electronic device in an environment where explosive gas exists may causeextreme risks.

1.4 Radiation

Electromagnetic Exposure

DANGERDanger indicates a hazard that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGWarning indicates a hazard that, if not avoided, could result in moderate or serious injury.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-5

Page 22: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

CAUTIONCaution indicates a hazard that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmitdirections of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

CAUTIONEnsure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

Forbidden AreaThe following requirements should be met:

l Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range,the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.

l A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbiddenarea.

Laser

CAUTIONWhen handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directlywith unaided eyes.

Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. Becausethe laser transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, it has the veryhigh power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters the eyes, theretina may be damaged.

In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated fiber or a damaged fiber with the unaided eye atdistances greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur, however, if anoptical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view the bare fiberend.

To avoid laser radiation, read the following guidelines:

l All the operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed theapproved training courses.

l Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.

l Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.

l Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not surewhether the optical source is switched off.

1 Safety PrecautionsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

1-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 23: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

l Use an optical power meter to check and ensure that the optical source is switched off bymeasuring the optical power.

l Before opening the front door of an optical transmission equipment, ensure that you arenot exposed to laser radiation.

l Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe toview the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Read the following instructions before handling fibers:

l Cutting and splicing fibers must be performed by the trained personnel only.

l Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the opticalsource. After disconnecting the fiber, connect the cover caps to the fiber connectors.

1.5 Working at Heights

CAUTIONWhen working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.

The requirements for working at heights are as follows:

l The personnel who work at heights must be trained.

l The operating machines and tools should be carried and handled safely to prevent themfrom falling down.

l Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, should be taken.

l Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.

l Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they areintact.

Weight Lifting

CAUTIONDo not enter the areas under the jib arm and the goods in suspension when lifting weight.

l Ensure that the operators have completed the related training and have been certified.

l Check the weight lifting tools and ensure that they are intact.

l Lift the weight only when the weight lifting tools are firmly fixed onto the weight-bearingobject or the wall.

l Use a concise command to prevent any incorrect operation.

l Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during thelifting, as shown in Figure 1-2.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

Page 24: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 1-2 Weight lifting

Using the LadderChecking the Ladder

l Before using the ladder, check and ensure that the ladder is intact.

l Before using the ladder, check the maximum weight that the ladder can support. Overweighton the ladder is strictly prohibited.

Placing the Ladder

A slant angle of 75 degrees is recommended. The slant can be measured with the angle squareor with arms, as shown in Figure 1-3. When a ladder is used, the wide part of the ladder shouldstand on the ground. Otherwise, take certain protective measures on the base part of the ladderto prevent against sliding. Place the ladder on a rigid ground.

1 Safety PrecautionsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

1-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 25: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 1-3 Schematic diagram of slanting a ladder

When climbing the ladder, note the following points:

l Ensure that the gravity center of your body does not deviate from the ladder edge.

l To lessen the danger and ensure the safety, keep your balance on the ladder before anyoperation.

l Do not climb higher than the forth highest step of the ladder.

If you intend to climb to the top, the length of the ladder should be at least one meter higher thanthe eave, as shown in Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4 Schematic diagram of the ladder one meter higher than the eave

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-9

Page 26: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

1.6 Mechanical Safety

Drilling Holes

CAUTIONDo not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Improper drilling may cause damageto the internal cables and the EMC function of the cabinet. Metallic scraps produced by thedrilling may fall into the cabinet and cause short circuits of the circuit boards.

l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.

l During the drilling, ensure that your eyes are protected properly. The flying metallic scrapsmay cause injury to your eyes.

l Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, wear the protection gloves.

l Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling,clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

CAUTIONWhen handling the equipment by hands, wear the protection gloves to avoid injury by sharpobjects.

Fansl When replacing components, ensure that no objects such as components, screws, and tools

fall into a fan that is running, to prevent damage to the fan or equipment.l When replacing the equipment close to a fan, do not put a finger or a board into a fan that

is running before the fan is switched off and stops running, to prevent injury to your handsor damage to the equipment.

Handling Heavy ObjectsWhen handling heavy objects, wear the protection gloves to prevent injury to your hands.

1 Safety PrecautionsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

1-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 27: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

CAUTIONl When handling heavy objects, ensure that the weight bearing measures are taken to prevent

you from being pressed or sprained.l When taking the chassis out from the cabinet, draw attention to the equipment that is unstable

or heavy on the cabinet, to prevent any pressing or smashing injury.

l When handling a chassis, generally, two persons rather than one person are required tohandle a heavy chassis. When handling a chassis, keep your back straight and move gentlyto prevent you from being sprained.

l When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handle or bottom of the chassis rather than thehandle of a module (such as a power supply module, a fan module, or a board) that hasbeen installed inside the chassis.

1.7 Other Precautions

Removing and Inserting Boards

CAUTIONWhen inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently toavoid bending pins on the backplane.

l Insert the board along the guiding slot.

l The contact of board circuits is not allowed to avoid short circuits or scratches.

l Do not touch the circuit, components, connectors, or routing channels of the board toprevent damage caused by electrostatic discharge of the human body to the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

CAUTIONBind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables

In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the externalplastic coatings of the cables. The following requirements should be observed to ensure safeimplementation:

l All the cables can be routed only when the ambient temperature is higher than zero degrees.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 1 Safety Precautions

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-11

Page 28: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

l If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is lower than zero degrees,you must transfer them to a place where the ambient temperature is room temperature atleast 24 hours before the operation.

l Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not performany improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

WARNINGIf the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the

flag may exceed 70°C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment,you must wear the protection gloves.

IF Cables

WARNINGBefore installing or removing an IF cable, you must turn off the power switch of the IF board.

1 Safety PrecautionsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

1-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 29: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

About This Chapter

This topic describes the operations that easily cause human body injuries and equipment damagein the process of commissioning and maintenance.

2.1 Operation Guide to a Toggle Lever SwitchThe ODU-PWR switch and the SYS-PWR switch are toggle lever switches. When you turn onor turn off the toggle lever switch, perform the operations in strict compliance with the guidelines.Otherwise, the IF board or the power board may be damaged.

2.2 Operation Guide to IF JumpersBefore removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, humanbody injuries may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.

2.3 Operation Guide to IF CablesBefore removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, humanbody injuries may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.

2.4 Operation Guide to IF BoardsBefore removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, the IFboard or the ODU may be damaged.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

Page 30: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

2.1 Operation Guide to a Toggle Lever SwitchThe ODU-PWR switch and the SYS-PWR switch are toggle lever switches. When you turn onor turn off the toggle lever switch, perform the operations in strict compliance with the guidelines.Otherwise, the IF board or the power board may be damaged.

Position and Description of the Toggle Lever Switch

A toggle lever switch is used on the power board or IF board to control the power supply to theIDU or ODU. as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Toggle lever switch

O:OFF

I:ON

Turning On the Toggle Lever Switch

2 Guides to High-Risk OperationsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 31: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

1. Pull the toggle lever switch out slightly.2. Turn it to the left.3. Release the toggle lever switch.

Turning Off the Toggle Lever Switch

1. Pull the toggle lever switch out slightly.2. Turn it to the right.3. Release the toggle lever switch.

2.2 Operation Guide to IF JumpersBefore removing or installing an IF jumper, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, humanbody injuries may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.

Procedure

Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide to aToggle Lever Switch.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Page 32: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

21

DANGERDo not remove any IF jumper before the ODU is powered off!

Step 2 Remove or install an IF jumper.

----End

2.3 Operation Guide to IF CablesBefore removing or installing an IF cable, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, humanbody injuries may be caused, and the IF board or the ODU may be damaged.

Procedure

Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide to aToggle Lever Switch.

2 Guides to High-Risk OperationsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 33: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

21

DANGERDo not remove any IF cable before the ODU is powered off!

Step 2 Install or remove an IF cable.

----End

2.4 Operation Guide to IF BoardsBefore removing or installing an IF board, turn off the ODU-PWR switch. Otherwise, the IFboard or the ODU may be damaged.

Procedure

Step 1 Turn off the ODU power switch on the IF board. For details, see 2.1 Operation Guide to aToggle Lever Switch.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 2 Guides to High-Risk Operations

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

Page 34: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

321

3

DANGERDo not remove or install any IF board before the ODU is powered off!

Step 2 Disconnect the IF jumper or IF cable.

Step 3 Remove or install an IF board.

----End

2 Guides to High-Risk OperationsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 35: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

3 Commissioning Preparations

About This Chapter

Before commissioning the equipment, you must make related preparations.

The commissioning preparations are as follows:

3.1 Commissioning ItemsThe commissioning items are classified into two categories: site commissioning items andsystem commissioning items.

3.2 Documents and Tools PreparationBased on the scale of the radio transmission network, commissioning engineers can adopt thehop commissioning method or network commissioning method.

3.3 Checking Commissioning ConditionsBefore performing site commissioning and system commissioning, check whether theequipment meets the commissioning requirements.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

Page 36: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

3.1 Commissioning ItemsThe commissioning items are classified into two categories: site commissioning items andsystem commissioning items.

3.1.1 Site Commissioning ItemsSite commissioning involves the commissioning of a hop of radio link and the sites on both ends.The purpose of site commissioning is to ensure that the hop of radio link is in normal state andto prepare for system commissioning.

3.1.2 System Commissioning ItemsSystem commissioning involves the commissioning of the entire radio transmission network.The purpose of system commissioning is to ensure that various services are transmitted normallyand protection functions are implemented on the radio transmission network.

3.1.1 Site Commissioning ItemsSite commissioning involves the commissioning of a hop of radio link and the sites on both ends.The purpose of site commissioning is to ensure that the hop of radio link is in normal state andto prepare for system commissioning.

In the case of the OptiX RTN 620, the following methods of site commissioning are available:l Using the Web LCT to configure data on site

l Using a hand-held tool to configure data on site

NOTE

When using a hand-held tool, you can only commission basic items.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using theWeb LCT)

Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT on sitewhen the following conditions are met:l Commissioning engineers are capable of configuring radio link data on the OptiX RTN

620.l Commissioning engineers are aware of the radio link data planning for the site.

l Commissioning engineers carry a laptop on which the LCT is installed.

Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data by using the Web LCT

Commissioning Item Remarks

Powering On the Equipment Required

Configuring SiteCommissioning Data byUsing the Web LCT

Accessing the Web LCT Required

Creating NEs by Using theSearch Method

Required

Logging In to an NE Required

3 Commissioning PreparationsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 37: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Commissioning Item Remarks

Changing the NE ID Required

Changing the Name of anNE

Optional

Setting CommunicationParameters of an NE

Required

Configuring LogicalBoards

Required

Creating an IF 1+1Protection Group

Optional

Configuring the IF/ODUInformation of a RadioLink

Required

Synchronizing NE Time Required

Configuring the Orderwire Optional

Checking Alarms Required

Testing Connectivity of theCables

Testing Connectivity of E1Cables (by using the WebLCT)

Required when E1 cables areused on the site

Testing Connectivity ofEthernet Cables

Required when Ethernetcables are used on the site

Testing Connectivity ofFiber Jumpers

Required when FiberJumpers are used on the site

Aligning Antennasa Aligning Single-PolarizedAntennas

Required when radio signalsare transmitted by single-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-PolarizedAntennas

Required when radio signalsare transmitted by dual-polarized antennas

Querying the Status of Radio Links Required

Querying the DCN Status Required

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, you must power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on bothends of the radio link.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Page 38: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using aHand-Held Tool)

Commissioning engineers can configure site commissioning data by using a hand-held tool onsite when the following conditions are met:

l Commissioning engineers are capable of configuring radio link data on the OptiX RTN620.

l Commissioning engineers are aware of the radio link data planning for the site.

l Commissioning engineers carry hand-held tools.

Table 3-2 Configuring site commissioning data by using a hand-held tool

Commissioning Item Remarks

Powering On the Equipment Required

Configuring SiteCommissioning Data byUsing a Hand-Held Tool

Connecting a Hand-heldTool to the IDU

Required

Configuring NE Attributes Required

Configuring a Radio Link Required

Checking Alarms Required

Testing Connectivity of theCables

Testing Connectivity of E1Cables with a Hand-HeldTool

Required when E1 cables areused on the site

Testing Connectivity of theEthernet Cables

Required when Ethernetcables are used on the site

Testing Connectivity ofFiber Jumpers

Required when optical fibersare used on the site

Aligning Antennasa Aligning Single-PolarizedAntennas

Required when radio signalsare transmitted by single-polarized antennas

Aligning Dual-PolarizedAntennas

Required when radio signalsare transmitted by dual-polarized antennas

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, you must power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data on bothends of the radio link.

3.1.2 System Commissioning ItemsSystem commissioning involves the commissioning of the entire radio transmission network.The purpose of system commissioning is to ensure that various services are transmitted normallyand protection functions are implemented on the radio transmission network.

3 Commissioning PreparationsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 39: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Table 3-3 System commissioning items

Commissioning Item Remarks

Configuring the Network-Wide ServiceData

Required

Testing the E1Service

Testing the E1Services by Using aBER Tester

Required when the E1 service is available anda BER tester is available on site

Testing the E1Service ThroughPRBS

Required when the E1 service is available anda BER tester is unavailable on site

Testing EthernetServices

Testing EthernetServices by Usingthe LB Function

Required when the NEs at both ends supportthe ETH-OAM function

Testing EthernetServices by Usingthe Ping Function

Required when the NE at one end supportsthe ETH-OAM function

Testing EthernetServices by UsingLaptops

Required when neither NEs at both endssupports the ETH-OAM function

Testing AMSwitching

Testing AMSwitching by Usinga BER Tester

Required when the AM function is enabledand a BER tester is available on site

Testing the AMSwitching Withouta BER Tester

Required when the AM function is enabledand no BER tester is available on site

Testing ProtectionSwitching

Testing IF 1+1Switching

Required when radio links are configured in1+1 HSB/FD/SD mode

Testing N+1ProtectionSwitching

Required when N+1 protection is configured

Testing SNCPSwitching

Required when the SNCP service isconfigured

Testing ERPS Required when ERPS is configured

Testing the Two-Fiber BidirectionalMSP Switching

Required when two-fiber bidirectional MSPis configured

Testing Linear MSPSwitching

Required when 1+1/1:N linear MSP isconfigured

Querying Clock Status Required

Testing the 24-Hour BER Required when the E1 service is available

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

Page 40: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

3.2 Documents and Tools PreparationBased on the scale of the radio transmission network, commissioning engineers can adopt thehop commissioning method or network commissioning method.

Documents

Before commissioning the equipment, you must make the following documents available:

l Engineering and design documents, including:– Network Planning

– Engineering Design

l Commissioning guide documents, including:– OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Commissioning Guide

– OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide

Tools

Table 3-4 lists the tools required for the commissioning task.

Table 3-4 List of tools and meters

Tool and Meter Application Scenario

Adjustable wrench, screwdriver, telescope,intercom, socket-head wrench, multimeterand a test cable with a BNC connector at oneend, north-stabilized indicator

Aligning the antennas

Laptop on which the LCT is installed l Configuring site commissioning data

l Testing connectivity of E1 cables

l Querying the DCN status

Hand-Held Tool Configuring site commissioning data

BER tester l Testing connectivity of E1 cables

l Testing E1 services by using a BER tester

l Testing the AM switching by using a BERtester

l Testing IF 1+1 switching

l Testing N+1 protection switching

l Testing SNCP switching

l Testing two-fiber bidirectional MSPswitching

l Testing linear MSP switching

l Testing 24-Hour BER

3 Commissioning PreparationsOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 41: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Tool and Meter Application Scenario

Network tester Testing connectivity of Ethernet cables

Optical power meter, short fiber jumper Testing connectivity of fiber jumpers

NMS server on which the Web LCT isinstalled

Network commissioning by using the WebLCT

E1 jumper Testing the 24-hour BER

3.3 Checking Commissioning ConditionsBefore performing site commissioning and system commissioning, check whether theequipment meets the commissioning requirements.

3.3.1 Checking Site Commissioning ConditionsBefore performing site commissioning, you need to check the equipment and the weather.

3.3.2 Checking System Commissioning ConditionsBefore performing system commissioning, you need to check the equipment and the weather.

3.3.1 Checking Site Commissioning ConditionsBefore performing site commissioning, you need to check the equipment and the weather.

The site commissioning conditions are listed as follows:

l The hardware installation must be complete and pass the installation check.

l The power for the equipment must be available.

l The service signal cables that are connected to other equipment must be routed as required.

l The site conditions and antenna commissioning personnel must meet the requirements foroperations at heights.

l The weather must be favorable without rain, snow, or mist.

3.3.2 Checking System Commissioning ConditionsBefore performing system commissioning, you need to check the equipment and the weather.

The system commissioning conditions are listed as follows:

l The NE commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link must becomplete.

l The weather must be favorable for outdoor work. There should be no rain, snow or fogbetween two sites.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 3 Commissioning Preparations

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

Page 42: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)
Page 43: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

4 Site Commissioning Guide

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to perform all site commissioning items.

4.1 Powering On the EquipmentBy checking the process of powering on equipment, you can check whether the hardware systemof the equipment and the power system are working properly.

4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using the Web LCTThis topic describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT.

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data with a Hand-Held ToolThis topic describes how to configure site commissioning data by using a hand-held tool.

4.4 Testing Connectivity of CablesIn the installation process, the hardware part of service cables may become faulty or the servicecables may be incorrectly connected. To ensure that services run normally, you need to testconnectivity of the cables.

4.5 Aligning AntennasAligning antennas is the most important activity in site commissioning, and its result has a directimpact on the performance of radio links.

4.6 Querying the Status of Radio LinksAfter aligning the antennas, you need to query the status of radio links and ensure that the radiolinks are in normal status.

4.7 Querying DCN StatusThe NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. Querying the radio links through the HOPmanagement function on the Web LCT, you can check whether the DCN of radio links runsnormally.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

Page 44: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

4.1 Powering On the EquipmentBy checking the process of powering on equipment, you can check whether the hardware systemof the equipment and the power system are working properly.

Prerequisitel The hardware installation must be complete and pass the installation check.

l The power supply must be available and the fuse capacity must meet the requirement ofthe equipment.

l The power supply (such as the power box of the cabinet) must be turned off.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsMultimeter

ContextIn the case of the OptiX RTN 620, the recommended fuse capacities are listed in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Fuse current

Chassis Fuse Current

OptiX RTN 620 12A

Precautions

CAUTIONl Check weather the power supply for the equipment is DC power supply.

l If the equipment houses PIU boards that are configured with 1+1 protection, the two PIUboards must be provided with the input power at the same nominal voltage.

l The SYS-PWR switch of the PXC board and the ODU-PWR switch of the IF board areequipped with locking devices. Thus, you must gently pull out the switches to turn them. Ifthe switch points to "O", it indicates that the switch is off. If the switch points to "I", itindicates that that switch is on.

l If the output voltage of the power supply does not meet the test requirements, reconstruct thepower supply and do not power on the cabinet.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the SYS-PWR switch of the PXC to "O".

Step 2 Set the ODU-PWR switch of the IF board to "O".

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 45: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 3 Use the multimeter to test the voltage and polarization of the input power at the access point(such as the output terminal of the power box on the cabinet).l When the nominal voltage of the input power is -48 V, the tested voltage should be between

-38.4 V and -57.6 V.l When the nominal voltage of the input power is -60 V, the tested voltage should be between

-48 V and -72 V.

WARNINGIf the measured voltage is not within the range, you must troubleshoot the power equipmentbefore proceeding to the next step. The voltage that is not within the range can cause damage tothe equipment or even personal injury.

Step 4 Check and ensure that the power cables are connected correctly, and turn on the power switchof the IDU.

Step 5 Set the SYS-PWR switch of the PXC board to "I". Check the indicators of the boards on theIDU.

The indicators conform to the following description:

1. As shown in Figure 4-1, the PWR indicator of the PXC board and the FAN indicator ofthe fan board are green. If the indicators are not green, handle the fault based on Table4-2.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

Page 46: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 4-1 Normal state

STAT PW

RSY

NC ACT

Table 4-2 States of indicators

Indicator State Description

PWR Constantly green Indicates that the power supply isin normal condition.

Off Indicates a power failure.

FAN Constantly green Indicates that the fan is runningnormally.

Constantly red Indicates that the fan is faulty.

Off Indicates that the board does notstart working, is not created, or notsupplied with power.

2. The PROG indicator on the front panel of the SCC board is green, off, blinks green, and

then off. The whole process lasts about two minutes.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 47: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

This process is based on the NE that is not configured with service data. If the NE is configured withservice data, this process lasts longer.

3. The STAT indicator on the front panel of the SCC board is green.

Figure 4-2 Normal state

STA

TPR

OG

NOTE

l For detailed meanings of the indicators, see the IDU Hardware Description.

l In the case of a board except the SCC board on the IDU, the STAT indicator is on only after thecorresponding logical board is added.

Step 6 Set the ODU-PWR switch of the IF board to "I". Check whether the ODU indicator of the IFboard is green.

NOTE

If the ODU indicator is not green, contact Huawei engineers to handle the fault.

----End

4.2 Configuring Site Commissioning Data by Using theWeb LCT

This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data by using the Web LCT.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

Page 48: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Procedure for Configuring a TDM Radio Link

Table 4-3 Procedure for configuring NEs

Step Operation Description

1 4.2.2 Creating NEs byUsing the SearchMethod

It is recommended that you perform this operationwhen you need to create NEs by using the centralizedNMS. Set the parameters as follows:Domain: When the IP address of the GNE is known,it is recommended that you set the IP address of theGNE as the search domain. In the case of initialconfiguration, it is recommended that you set the129.9.255.255 network segment as the searchdomain.

2 4.2.3 Logging In to anNE

Required. Set the parameters as follows:Set User Name and Password to correct values. Thedefault User Name is lct and the default Passwordis password.

3 4.2.4 Changing NE IDs Required. Set the parameters as follows:l Set New ID to be the NE ID specified in the DCN

planning information.l If a unique extended NE ID is required, change

New Extended ID.

4 4.2.5 Changing NENames

Optional.

5 4.2.6 Setting NECommunicationParameters

Required. Set the parameters as follows:l In the case of a GNE, set IP and Subnet Mask

according to the planning information of theexternal DCN.

l In the case of a GNE, set Gateway IP if theexternal DCN requires.

l In the case of a non-GNE, it is recommended thatyou set IP to 0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if theNE ID is 0x090001, set IP to 129.9.0.1. SetSubnet Mask to 255.255.0.0.

NOTEIf the IP address of an NE has not been changed manually,the IP address changes according to the NE ID and isalways 0x81000000 + NE ID. In this case, the IP addressof a non-GNE need not be changed manually.

6 4.2.7 ConfiguringLogical Boards

Required.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 49: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step Operation Description

7 4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

Required when a radio link is configured with 1+1protection.Set the parameters according to the service planninginformation.

8 4.2.9 Configuring theIF/ODU Informationof a Radio Link

Required. Set the parameters as follows:l Set Work Mode, Link ID, and ATPC Enable

Status according to the service planninginformation.

l Set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.

l Set TX Frequency (MHz), TX Power(dBm),and T/R Spacing(MHZ) according to the serviceplanning information.

l Set TX Status to unmute.

l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the receivelevel specified in the service planninginformation. The antenna non-alignmentindication function is enabled only after thisparameter is set. When the antenna non-alignmentindication function is enabled, if the actual receivepower of the ODU is beyond the range of thepreset receive power ± 3 dB, the ODU indicatoron the IF board connected to the ODU blinksyellow (300 ms on and 300 ms off), indicating thatthe antennas are not aligned. After the antennasare aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NEautomatically disables the antenna non-alignmentindication function.

NOTE

l In the case of radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD,you need to configure the IF and ODU information onlyon the main radio link. In the case of radio linksconfigured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IFand ODU information on the main radio link and theODU information on the standby radio link.

l To configure TDM radio links with N+1 protection, youneed to configure the IF and ODU information on eachlink.

9 4.2.10 SynchronizingNE Time

Required. During the site commissioning, you onlyneed to synchronize the NE with the NMS.

10 4.2.11 Configuring theOrderwire

Optional.

11 4.2.12 CheckingAlarms

Required.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

Page 50: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

l The preceding configuration procedure is applicable to the scenarios wherein HWECC is used as theDCN solution. When a DCN solution other than HWECC is used, the DCN-related operations describedin the preceding configuration procedure may be inapplicable.

l Only SDH radio in STM-1 mode supports N+1 protection configuration and XPIC configuration.

l In the case of radio links configured with N+1 protection group, you need to configure each radio linkseparately.

l If the SDH microwave uses the XPIC function, consider the XPIC workgroup as two independent SDHradio links and configure the two radio links separately.

Procedure for Configuring a Hybrid Radio Link

Table 4-4 Procedure for configuring NEs

Step Operation Description

1 4.2.2 Creating NEs byUsing the SearchMethod

It is recommended that you perform this operationwhen you need to create NEs by using the centralizedNMS. Set the parameters as follows:Domain: When the IP address of the GNE is known,it is recommended that you set the IP address of theGNE as the search domain. In the case of initialconfiguration, it is recommended that you set the129.9.255.255 network segment as the searchdomain.

2 4.2.3 Logging In to anNE

Required. Set the parameters as follows:Set User Name and Password to correct values. Thedefault User Name is lct and the default Passwordis password.

3 4.2.4 Changing NE IDs Required. Set the parameters as follows:l Set New ID to be the NE ID specified in the DCN

planning information.l If a unique extended NE ID is required, change

New Extended ID.

4 4.2.5 Changing NENames

Optional.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 51: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step Operation Description

5 4.2.6 Setting NECommunicationParameters

Required. Set the parameters as follows:l In the case of a GNE, set IP and Subnet Mask

according to the planning information of theexternal DCN.

l In the case of a GNE, set Gateway IP if theexternal DCN requires.

l In the case of a non-GNE, it is recommended thatyou set IP to 0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if theNE ID is 0x090001, set IP to 129.9.0.1. SetSubnet Mask to 255.255.0.0.

NOTEIf the IP address of an NE has not been changed manually,the IP address changes according to the NE ID and isalways 0x81000000 + NE ID. In this case, the IP addressof a non-GNE need not be changed manually.

6 4.2.7 ConfiguringLogical Boards

Required.

7 4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group

Required when a radio link is configured with 1+1protection.Set the parameters according to the service planninginformation.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

Page 52: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step Operation Description

8 4.2.9 Configuring theIF/ODU Informationof a Radio Link

Required. Set the parameters as follows:l Set Enable AM and Channel Space according to

the networking planning information.l Set Enable AM to Disabled and set Manually

Specified Modulation to Guaranteed CapacityModulation according to the service planninginformation.

l Set E1 Capacity, Link ID, and ATPC EnableStatus according to the service planninginformation.

l Set ATPC Enable Status to Disabled.

l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz),and TX Power(dBm according to the serviceplanning information.

l Set TX Status to unmute.

l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the receivelevel specified in the service planninginformation. The antenna non-alignmentindication function is enabled only after thisparameter is set. When the antenna non-alignmentindication function is enabled, if the actual receivepower of the ODU is beyond the range of thepreset receive power ± 3 dB, the ODU indicatoron the IF board connected to the ODU blinksyellow (300 ms on and 300 ms off), indicating thatthe antennas are not aligned. After the antennasare aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NEautomatically disables the antenna non-alignmentindication function.

NOTEIn the case of radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD,you need to configure the IF and ODU information onlyon the main radio link. In the case of radio links configuredwith 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODUinformation on the main radio link and the ODUinformation on the standby radio link.

9 4.2.10 SynchronizingNE Time

Required. During the site commissioning, you onlyneed to synchronize the NE with the NMS.

10 4.2.11 Configuring theOrderwire

Optional.

11 4.2.12 CheckingAlarms

Required.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 53: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

l The preceding configuration procedure is applicable to the scenarios wherein HWECC is used as theDCN solution. When a DCN solution other than HWECC is used, the DCN-related operations describedin the preceding configuration procedure may be inapplicable.

4.2.1 Connecting the Web LCT to the IDUConnecting the Web LCT to the IDU properly is a prerequisite for future data configuration andfor other commissioning items.

PrerequisiteThe equipment must be powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsLaptop on which the LCT is installed

Procedure

Step 1 Start the laptop computer, and log in to the operating system.

Step 2 Set the IP address information about this computer.The IP address should comply with the following conditions:l IP address: The IP address should be in the same network segment (129.9.0.0 by default) as

the IP address of the NE. The IP address of the computer and the IP address of the NE cannotbe the same.

l Subnet mask: The subnet mask of the computer is the same as the subnet mask of the NE(the default subnet mask is 255.255.0.0).

l Default gateway: null

Step 3 Use a network cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the port marked "ETH" on theSCC.The ETH interface supports the MDI/MDI-X autosensing. Hence, you can use the straight-through cable or crossover cable to connect to it.In this case, the green indicators of the ETH interface and network interface of the laptopcomputer are lit on. In addition, if you set the prompt for the local area connection in the operatingsystem of the laptop computer, a prompt is displayed indicating that the network is connected.If the operating system prompts an IP address conflict, set the IP address again.

Step 4 Optional: Set the Internet Explorer (IE) as the default browser.

Step 5 Optional: Set the priority level of the IE to middle or below.

Step 6 Optional: Disable the function that blocks the popup window.

NOTEIf there are other installed plug-ins to block the popup window, disable the function of all the plug-ins.

Step 7 Optional: Set the options of the IE.1. Start the IE.2. Choose Tools > Internet Options from the toolbar.3. In the Common tab, click Settings in the Internet Temporaries box.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

Page 54: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

4. In Check for newer versions of stored pages, click Every visit to the page, and thenclick OK.

5. Click OK.

Step 8 On desktop, double-click the Start Web LCT icon.The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

Step 9 Enter User Name and Password, and then click Login.The user name of the Web LCT is admin by default, and the corresponding password is adminby default.If the entered user name and the password are both correct, the NE List page is displayed in theIE.

----End

4.2.2 Creating NEs by Using the Search MethodThe Web LCT can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE according to theIP address of the gateway NE or the IP address range of the gateway NE. In addition, the WebLCT can create the NEs in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, thismethod is quicker and more reliable.

PrerequisiteThe NEs must gain the access to the computer where the Web LCT software is installed.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 55: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

ContextYou can create an NE by searching for the NE and then adding the NE on the Web LCT. Inaddition, you can create an NE by adding the NE manually. Generally, the NE ID is not knownduring initial NE configuration. Therefore, the searching method is used to create an NE in mostcases.

Procedure

Step 1 In NE List, click NE Search.Then, the Search NE dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Optional: Set Domain to 129.9.255.255, and click Search.

NOTE

During initial configuration, Domain is 129.9.255.255 by default. After the gateway NE IP address of thesearched NE is changed, you need to change the value of Domain.

Step 3 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

Step 4 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully.

Step 5 Click OK.A new NE is already added to the NE list.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

Page 56: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 6 Click Cancel.

----End

4.2.3 Logging In to an NEAfter an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The NEs to be managed must be created in the NE List.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.TIP

You can select more than one NE at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

l The default User Name is lct.

l The default Password of user lct is password.

Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changedfrom Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE.

Step 3 Click NE Explorer.The NE Explorer is displayed.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 57: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

TIP

To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list.

TIP

l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layoutdiagram.

l Click to fold/unfold the legend.

----End

Example

Table 4-5 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

User Name - lct This parameter specifies the name of theuser. This parameter can take the defaultvalue in the case of initial login.

Password - - The default password of user lct ispassword.

Use same username andpassword to login

SelectedDeselected

Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter UserName and Password to log in to all theselected NEs.

Use the user nameand password thatwas used last time

SelectedDeselected

Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter UserName and Password that were used for thelatest login to log in to the NE.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

Page 58: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

4.2.4 Changing NE IDsThis section describes how to change NE IDs according to the engineering plan to ensure thateach NE ID is unique. The modification does not affect services.

Prerequisite

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NEAttribute from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Modify NE ID.The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set a new ID for the NE.

Step 4 Click OK.Then, a dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

----End

Example

Table 4-6 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

New ID 1 to 49135 - l The new ID refers to the basic ID. Whenthe extended ID is not used, the basic IDof an NE within any network that ismanaged by an NMS must be unique.

l Set this parameter according to the DCNplanning information.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 59: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l When the number of existing NEs doesnot exceed the range represented by thebasic ID, do not modify the extended ID.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

NOTE

The NE ID has 24 bits. The highest eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended ID) and the lowest 16bits represent the basic ID. For example, if the ID of an NE is 0x090001, the subnet ID of the NE is 9 and thebasic ID is 1.

Postrequisite

In the case of the OptiX RTN 620, you only need to close the NE Explorer and then re-log in tothe NE, if the IP address does not change accordingly after the NE ID changes; You need todelete the original NE, create an NE, and then log in to the NE, if the IP address of the NEchanges after the NE ID changes. Before the IP address of the NE is changed manually, the IPaddress changes accordingly if the NE ID changes. After the IP address of the NE is changedmanually, the IP address does not change accordingly if the NE ID changes.

4.2.5 Changing NE NamesTo accurately identify an NE in the Main Topology, you need to name the NE according to thegeographical location or the equipment connected to the NE.

Prerequisite

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > NEAttribute from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in Name.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

4.2.6 Setting NE Communication ParametersThe communication parameters of an NE include the IP address and extended ID of the NE, thegateway IP address, NSAP address, and the subnet mask.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

Page 60: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

PrerequisiteThe NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication >Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Set the communication parameters of the NE.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

Example

Table 4-7 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

IP - Before delivery, theIP address of the NEis set to 129.9.0.x.The letter x indicatesthe basic ID.

In the HWECC solution, an IP address is setaccording to the following rules:l The IP address, subnet mask, and default

gateway of the gateway NE must meet the

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 61: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Gateway IP planning requirements of the externalDCN.

l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IPaddress must be in the same networksegment.

l The IP address of other NEs must be setaccording to the NE ID. In this example,the IP address of an NE must be set in theformat of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if theID is 0x090001, the IP address must beset to 129.9.0.1.

- 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when thenumber of actual NEs does not exceed therange permitted by the basic NE ID.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

NSAP Address - - This parameter is valid only when the OSIover DCC solution is applied. Thisparameter is used to set only the area ID ofan NSAP address. The other parts of theNSAP address are automatically generatedby the NE.

Connection Mode CommonSecurity SSL

Common The communication between the client andthe server is encrypted if this parameter isset to Security SSL.

4.2.7 Configuring Logical BoardsIf the logical board corresponding to a physical board is not added in the slot layout, add thelogical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in theslot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l All the boards must be installed correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

Context

The NE software manages a physical board by considering the physical board as one or morelogical boards. In the OptiX RTN 620:

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-19

Page 62: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

l An SCC physical board is considered as a logical SCC and a logical EOW board. The slotnumber of the logical SCC board is 2, and the slot number of the logical EOW is 21.

l Other physical boards of the IDU are considered as the logical boards with the same names.The slot numbers of the logical boards are the same as the slot numbers of the correspondingphysical boards.

An ODU is considered as an ODU logical board. The ODU logical slot number is 10 plus theslot number of the IF board connected to the ODU.

The STAT indicator on the physical IDU board will be lit only if the logical IDU board matcheswith the physical IDU board.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Logical Boards.

Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are requiredbut still not be configured for certain physical boards.

Step 2 Optional: Right-click the slots in which boards are to be added, and select Add xxx. "xxx" refersto the boards to be added.

NOTE

Add the PXC board before you add the IF boards and service boards.

Manually adding the logical boards applies to the cases when relevant data need to be configured before thephysical boards are installed.

Step 3 Optional: Right-click the slots in which boards are to be deleted, and select Delete.Delete the services, clock, orderwire and protections on the boards before you delete the boards.

----End

4.2.8 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection GroupIf the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

Step 3 Click New.Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 63: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 4 Set the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-21

Page 64: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Example

Table 4-8 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Working Mode HSBFDSD

HSB l In 1+1 HSB protection mode, the systemprovides a 1+1 hot standby configurationfor the IF board and ODU at both ends ofeach hop of a radio link to provideprotection.

l In 1+1 FD protection mode, the systemuses two channels that have a frequencyspacing between them, to transmit andreceive the same signal. The remote endselects signals from the two receivedsignals. With the 1+1 FD protection, theimpact of the fading on signaltransmission is reduced.

l In 1+1 SD protection mode, the systemuses two antennas that have a spacedistance between them, to receive thesame signal. The equipment selectssignals from the two received signals.With the 1+1 SD protection, the impactof the fading on signal transmission isreduced.

l The 1+1 FD protection mode and 1+1 SDprotection mode are compatible with the1+1 HSB switching function.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information.

Revertive Mode RevertiveNon-Revertive

Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching statereleases the switching and enables theformer working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the formerworking channel is restored to normal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switchingstate keeps the current state unchangedunless another switching occurs eventhough the former working channel isrestored to normal.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 65: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

WTR Time (s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only whenRevertive Mode is set to Revertive.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset wait-to-restore (WTR) time, arevertive switching occurs.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

Enable ReverseSwitching

EnableDisable

Enable l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms to thesource end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. Whenthis parameter at the source end is set toEnable and the reverse switchingconditions are met, the IF 1+1 protectionswitching occurs at the source end.

l This parameter is valid only whenWorking Mode is set to HSB or SD.

l Generally, if Working Mode is set toHSB, it is recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled; if WorkingMode is set to SD, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Enabled.

Working Board IF ports - l In 1+1 FD/SD mode, two IF boards mustbe installed as a pair in slots 5 and 7 (theIF board in slot 5 is recommended to bethe main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IFboard in slot 6 is recommended to be themain board).

l In 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can beinstalled in slots 5-8. It is recommendedthat you install two IF boards in a pair inslots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is themain board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IFboard in slot 6 is the main board).

Protection Board

NOTE

The parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time (s), and Enable Reverse Switching mustbe set to the same values at both ends of a radio link hop.

Postrequisitel In the case of 1+1 HSB protection and 1+1 SD protection, you need to configure the IF/

ODU information of the main radio link later. The standby radio link automatically copies

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-23

Page 66: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

the related information of the active microwave link except the transmission status of theODU.

l In the case of 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of themain radio link and the information of the standby ODU later. The standby radio linkautomatically copies the IF information of the main radio link.

NOTE

The default TX Status of an ODU is Unmute. Therefore, you need not configure the TX Status of the standbyODU after you create an IF 1+1 protection group.

4.2.9 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio LinkBy configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link, you can configure the IF/ODUinformation that is frequently used by the radio link.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Precautionsl In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In

this case, you need configure only the IF/ODU information of the main equipment.l In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this

case, you need configure the IF/ODU information of the main equipment and the ODUinformation of the standby equipment.

l In the case of XPIC radio links, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links. TheIF/ODU information of the radio links must be configured in the XPIC workgroup.

l In the case of N+1 protection mode, one N+1 protection group corresponds to N+1 radiolinks and the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links must be set separately.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board orODU to which the IF board is connected belongs.

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

Step 7 Click Apply.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 67: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

You need to click Apply after you set the IF information of the radio link and click Apply after you set the ODUinformation of the radio link.

----End

Example

Table 4-9 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK2,4E1,3.5MHz,16QAM3,8E1,14MHz,QPSK4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM8,E3,28MHz,QPSK9,E3,14MHz,16QAM10,22E1,14MHz,32QAM11,26E1,14MHz,64QAM12,32E1,14MHz,128QAM13,35E1,28MHz,16QAM14,44E1,28MHz,32QAM15,53E1,28MHz,64QAM16,5E1,7MHz,QPSK17,10E1,14MHz,QPSK18,2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK

- l This parameter indicates the radio workmode in "work mode, service capacity,channel spacing, modulation mode"format.

l The IF1A/IF1B board supports radioworking modes 1-15 and the IF0A/IF0Bboard supports radio working modes 5and 16-18. The IFX board supports radioworking mode 7.

l The IFH2 board on the IDU 620 does notsupport Work Mode.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information. The radioworking modes of the IF boards at bothends of the radio link must be the same.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-25

Page 68: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Link ID 1 to 4094 - l As the identifier of a radio link, thisparameter is used to preventmisconnection of radio links betweensites.

l If this parameter is different fromReceived Link ID, the NE reports theMW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS intothe downstream.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information. Each radiolink of an NE must have a unique link ID,and the link IDs at both ends of a radiolink must be the same.

Received Link ID - - This parameter displays the received linkID.NOTE

The link ID at the local end must the same as thelink ID at the opposite end.

ATPC EnableStatus

EnabledDisabled

- l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled. Thisparameter indicates whether the ATPCfunction is enabled. The ATPC functionensures that the transmit power of thetransmitter automatically traces thechanges of the receive level at the receiveend, within the ATPC controlled range.

l In the case of areas where fast fading issevere, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to Disabled.

l During commissioning, set thisparameter to Disabled to ensure that thetransmit power is not changed. Aftercommissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC Threshold(dBm)

- - This parameter displays the permittedATPC adjustment range.

ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)

-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lowerthreshold to a value for the expectedreceive power.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) to the

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 69: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm)

-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 difference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

ATPC AutomaticThreshold EnableStatus

EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function isenabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholdsaccording to the work mode of the radiolink.

l If this parameter is set to Disabled, youneed to manually set ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm) and ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm).

TX Frequency(MHz)

0 to 4294967.295 - l The parameter specifies the channelcenter frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower transmitfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper transmit frequencylimit supported by the ODU and a half ofthe channel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies of the ODUs at both ends ofa radio link is a T/R spacing.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information.

Range of TXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter specifies the transmitfrequency range of an ODU.

Actual TXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter displays the actual transmitfrequency of an ODU.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-27

Page 70: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Actual RXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter displays the actual receivefrequency of an ODU.

T/R Spacing(MHZ)

0 to 4294967.295 - l This parameter indicates the spacingbetween the TX frequency and receivefrequency of the ODU. If Station Typeof the ODU is TX high, the transmitfrequency is one T/R spacing higher thanthe receive power. If Station Type of theODU is TX low, the transmit frequencyis one T/R spacing lower than the receivepower.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends ofa radio link.

Actual T/RSpacing(MHZ)

- - This parameter displays the actual T/Rspacing of a board.

TX Power(dBm) -10.0 to +35.0 - l The value of this parameter must notexceed the rated power range supportedby the ODU.

l The transmit power of the ODU must beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information.

Range of TX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter specifies the transmit powerrange of an ODU.

Actual TX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter displays the actual transmitpower of an ODU.

Actual RX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter displays the actual receivepower of an ODU.

TX Status muteunmute

- l When Transmission Status is set tomute, the transmitter of the ODU doesnot work but the ODU can normallyreceive radio signals.

l When Transmission Status is set tounmute, the ODU normally transmitsand receives radio signals.

l This parameter, generally, takes thedefault value.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 71: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Actual TX Status muteunmute

- This parameter displays the transmissionstatus of the RF transmitter.

Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter displays the operatingfrequency band of an ODU.

Equip Type - - This parameter displays the type of an ODU.

Station Type - - This parameter displays the type of a site.

Produce SN - - This parameter displays the productionserial number and the manufacturer code ofan ODU.

TransmissionPower Type

- - This parameter displays the output powerlevel of an ODU.

NOTE

The ATPC attributes must be set to the same at both the ends of a radio link.

4.2.10 Synchronizing NE TimeBy synchronizing the time of an NE, you can set the time on the NE to be synchronized withthe time on the Web LCT.

Prerequisitel The NE must be configured with basic data.

l In the case of the laptop on which the LCT is installed, the time zone must be set correctlyand the time of the laptop must be accurate.

l The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsLaptop on which the LCT is installed

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and then choose Configuration > NE TimeSynchronization from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Right-click the NE time of which needs to be synchronized, and choose Synchronize with NMTime from the shortcut menu.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-29

Page 72: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

----End

4.2.11 Configuring the OrderwireThe orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the networkmaintenance personnel can use.

PrerequisiteThe NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

ContextThe communication channel must be available for activating the orderwire.

l When an SDH optical/electrical line exists between two NEs, the overhead byte E1 or E2in the SDH frames can be used as the orderwire communication channel.

l When a radio link exists between two NEs, a fixed overhead byte in the radio frames canbe used as the orderwire communication channel.

l When no SDH optical/electrical line and microwave link exists between two NEs, connectthe external clock ports or synchronous data ports of the two NEs to provide the orderwirecommunication channel.

The OptiX RTN 620 supports the group call function of the orderwire. When an OptiX RTN620 dials the orderwire group call number 888, the orderwire phones of all the OptiX RTN620s in the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 620 answers the phone call, the otherOptiX RTN 620s stop ringing, that is, the group call becomes a point-to-point call between twoNEs.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwirefrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the General tab.

Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 73: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 4 Click the Apply.

Step 5 Optional: Modify the orderwire occupied overhead bytes.1. Click the Advanced tab.2. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

3. Click the Apply.

----End

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-31

Page 74: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Example

Table 4-10 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Call Waiting Time(s)

1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting timeafter the local station dials the number. Ifthe calling station does not receive theresponse message from the called stationwithin the call waiting time, itautomatically removes thecommunication connection.

l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwiresubnet, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to 5s. If more than 30nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto 9s.

l Set the same call waiting time for all theNEs.

Phone 1 100 to99999999 101 l This parameter indicates the orderwirephone number of the local station.

l The length of the orderwire phonenumber of each NE should be the same.It is recommended that the phone numberconsists of three numerics.

l The orderwire phone number of each NEshould be unique. It is recommended thatthe phone numbers are allocated from101 for the NEs according to the NE IDs.

l The orderwire phone number cannot beset to the group call number 888 andcannot start with 888.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 75: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Orderwire port Line portsexternal clock portF1 port

- l This parameter indicates the ports thatcan transmit the orderwire information.

l The OptiX RTN 620 does not supportconference calls and thus allows the linesthat transmit the orderwire information toform a loop.

l If the radio link between two nodes isconfigured with 1+1 protection, only theline port of the main IF board need to beused as the orderwire port.

l If multiple links (for example, configuredwith XPIC or N+1 protection) existbetween two nodes, the line portscorresponding to all the links need to beused as the orderwire ports.

l When orderwire communication isimplemented by interconnecting the twoNEs through the external clock ports, theexternal clock ports need to be used as theorderwire ports.

l When orderwire communication isimplemented by interconnecting the twoNEs through the synchronous data ports,the F1 port need to be used as theorderwire port.

OrderwireOccupied Bytes

E1E2

E1 l This parameter indicates the overheadbyte that is used to transmit the orderwireinformation.

l Regardless the parameter value, the radiolink uses a fixed self-defined overheadbyte to transmit the orderwireinformation. Hence, this parametershould be set according to the occupiedSDH overhead bytes in the ordinarySDH.

4.2.12 Checking AlarmsBy checking the alarms generated by the equipment, you can check whether the equipment isworking properly.

Prerequisitel The NE must be connected to the Web LCT.

l The NE must be configured with basic data.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-33

Page 76: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsLaptop on which the LCT is installed

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an NE from the Object Tree, and then click in the toolbar.

Step 2 Click the Browse Current Alarms tab.

Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information.Check whether there are equipment alarms, particularly the following types of alarms:l POWER_ALM

l FAN_FAIL

l HARD_BAD

l BD_STATUS

l SYNC_C_LOS

l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT

l NESF_LOST

l TEMP_ALARM

l IF_CABLE_OPEN

l XPIC_LOS

For details on the previous alarms and about how to handle them, see the Maintenance Guide.

----End

4.3 Configuring Site Commissioning Data with a Hand-Held Tool

This topic describes how to configure site commissioning data by using a hand-held tool.

4.3.1 Connecting Hand-Held Tools to IDUsHand-held tools need to be connected to IDUs before data configuration.

4.3.2 Set NE AttributesBy setting NE attributes, you can configure NE ID, NE IP, and NE name.

4.3.3 Configuring a Radio LinkTo configure a radio link, you can configure the IF information, ODU information and protectionmodes of the radio link.

4.3.4 Checking AlarmsBy checking the current alarms on the equipment, you can check whether the equipment isworking normally.

4.3.1 Connecting Hand-Held Tools to IDUsHand-held tools need to be connected to IDUs before data configuration.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 77: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

PrerequisiteThe equipment must be powered on.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsHand-held tools

Procedure

Step 1 Use appropriate cables to connect hand-held tools to IDUs, as shown in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 Connecting hand-held tools to IDUs

DB9-female DB9-male DB9-male

Hand-heldtool

IDU 620COM port

MINI USBport

Step 2 Press the Power button on a hand-held tool until the hand-held tool starts. Two seconds later,the login interface is displayed.

Step 3 The hand-held tool logs in to the system automatically and queries the NE information. Thequeried slot information is displayed in the standby interface.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-35

Page 78: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

l If the Login Fail ! message is displayed in the login interface, the hand-held tool starts another loginattempt until login succeeds.

l Login is completed automatically and may last a long period. Do not press any button in the loginprocess. Otherwise, the system stops the login process.

l In the standby interface, the hand-held tool relogs in to the system any time you press the 0 button.

l If the Abnormal Connection message is displayed in the standby interface, check the physicalconnection between the hand-held tool and the NE. Ensure that the connection is normal and then relogin to the system.

l The upward arrow in the upper right corner of the standby interface indicates the status of the physicalconnection. If the arrow blinks regularly, the connection is normal. Otherwise, relog in to the systemaccording to the prompt message of the system.

----End

4.3.2 Set NE AttributesBy setting NE attributes, you can configure NE ID, NE IP, and NE name.

Prerequisite

The hand-held tool must be logged in to the NE.

Procedure

Step 1 When the hand-held tool is in the standby interface, press F2 to configure NE attributes.

Step 2 Set the NE name.1. Select 1-NE name and press Enter. Then the setting interface is displayed.

2. Set the NE name according to network planning.

NOTE

l Only the first 11 characters of the NE name can be displayed on the interface.

l Currently, the NE name can be a maximum of 21 English characters. Press the F1 key to enterdifferent characters.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 79: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

3. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 3 Configure NE ID and extended ID.

1. Select 2-NE ID and press Enter. Then the setting interface is displayed.

2. Set NE ID according to network planning.

3. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.

4. Select 3-Ext-ID and press Enter. Then the setting interface is displayed.

5. Set the extended ID according to network planning.

6. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 4 Configure NE IP, subnet mask, and gateway NE.

1. Select 5-IP and press Enter. Then the setting interface is displayed.

2. Set NE IP according to network planning.

NOTE

The IP address is composed of four sections. After you finish one section, press Enter to enter thenext section.

3. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.

4. Select 6-MSK and press Enter. Then the setting interface is displayed.

5. Set the subnet mask according to network planning.

6. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-37

Page 80: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

7. Select 7-GNE and press Enter. Then the setting interface is displayed.

8. Set the gate NE according to network planning.9. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 5 Select 8- APPLY, and press Enter to save the data.The Confirm Configure ? dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Select YES and press Enter to save the data. Then, the system starts saving the previousconfiguration.

NOTE

l In the configuration process, you can press C to return to the previous menu.

l After the system saves the configuration, it automatically backs up the database and the backup operationrequires 30 to 60 seconds. You need to check the backup result.

l If you change NE ID or extended ID in the configuration process, the hand-held tool automatically relogsin to the system after the system successfully backs up the changed data. Then, the standby interface isdisplayed. If the system fails in backing up the changed data, the current configuration interface is displayed.

----End

4.3.3 Configuring a Radio LinkTo configure a radio link, you can configure the IF information, ODU information and protectionmodes of the radio link.

Prerequisite

The hand-held tool must be logged in to the NE.

Procedure

Step 1 When the hand-held tool is in the standby interface, press F1 to configure IF attributes.

NOTE

By default, the system displays the information about the radio link carried by the IF board in the slot of a smallernumber.

Step 2 Select the board to be configured.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 81: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

1. Select 1-Board and press Enter. Then the selection interface is displayed.

2. Select the online IF board.3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of themain radio link only.

Step 3 Configure IF 1+1 protection.1. Select 7-Protection and press Enter. Then, the selection interface of IF 1+1 protection

modes is displayed.

2. Select an IF 1+1 protection mode according to network planning.

When you configure IF 1+1 protection with a hand-held tool, the default main/standby IFboards are as follows:

Link ID Slot of main IF board Slot of standby IF board

1 5 7

2 6 8

NOTE

Hand-held tools do not support the configuration of 1+1 FD.

3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of themain radio link only.

Step 4 Configuring IF information for a radio link1. Select 5-BandWidth and press Enter. Then the selection interface of IF bandwidth is

displayed.

2. Select the IF bandwidth according to network planning.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-39

Page 82: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

3. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of themain radio link only.

4. Select 6-Modulate and press Enter. Then the selection interface of modulation modes isdisplayed.

5. Select the modulation mode according to network planning.6. Press Enter to return to the previous menu.

NOTE

In the case of 1+1 HSB/SD radio links, you need to configure the IF and ODU information of themain radio link only.

Step 5 Configure the ODU information of NEs.1. Select 2-Frequency and press Enter. Then the selection interface of transmit frequencies

is displayed.

2. Enter the value of transmit frequency (MHz) according to network planning.

NOTE

l Press the F1 key to enter a point.

l If the ODU is online, the system displays the frequency range that the ODU supports.

3. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.4. Select 3-TRSpacing and press Enter. Then the configuration interface of T/R spacing is

displayed.

5. Enter the value of T/R spacing (MHz) according to network planning.

NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.

6. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.7. Select 4-TX Power and press Enter. Then the configuration interface of transmit power

is displayed.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 83: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

8. Enter the value of transmit power (dBm) according to network planning.

NOTE

Press the F1 key to enter a point.

9. Press Enter to save the setting and return to the previous menu.

Step 6 Select 8 APPLY and press Enter to confirm the previous configuration.The system starts delivering the configuration. After the configuration is delivered, the last lineof the system interface displays Any Key To Continue.

Step 7 Press any key to continue. After the configuration is stored, the current configuration interfaceis automatically displayed.

NOTE

The waiting time is about 30 to 60 seconds.

----End

4.3.4 Checking AlarmsBy checking the current alarms on the equipment, you can check whether the equipment isworking normally.

PrerequisiteThe hand-held tool must be logged in to the NE.

Procedure

Step 1 When the hand-held tool is in the standby interface, press F3 to query the NE information.

Step 2 Select 5-Current Alarm Query and press Enter. Then the query interface is displayed.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-41

Page 84: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 3 Check the displayed alarm information.Check whether there are equipment alarms, particularly the following types of alarms:l POWER_ALM

l FAN_FAIL

l HARD_BAD

l BD_STATUS

l SYNC_C_LOS

l CONFIG_NOSUPPORT

l NESF_LOST

l TEMP_ALARM

l IF_CABLE_OPEN

l XPIC_LOS

For details on the previous alarms and about how to handle them, see the Maintenance Guide.

----End

4.4 Testing Connectivity of CablesIn the installation process, the hardware part of service cables may become faulty or the servicecables may be incorrectly connected. To ensure that services run normally, you need to testconnectivity of the cables.

4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables (by Using the Web LCT)By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipmentand the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the E1 cables are in normal status. When youuse the Web LCT to perform site commissioning, use the E1 BER tester to test connectivity ofE1 cables.

4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables with a Hand-Held ToolBy testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipmentand the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the cables are in normal status. Whenperforming site commissioning with a hand-held tool, test the connectivity of E1 cables throughthe PRBS function enabled on an NE.

4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Ethernet CablesBy testing connectivity of Ethernet cables, you can check whether the Ethernet cables are innormal status.

4.4.4 Testing Connectivity of Fiber JumpersBy testing connectivity of optical fibers, you can check whether the fiber jumpers between theequipment and the ODF are correctly connected and whether the fiber jumpers are in normalstatus.

4.4.1 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables (by Using the Web LCT)By testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipmentand the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the E1 cables are in normal status. When youuse the Web LCT to perform site commissioning, use the E1 BER tester to test connectivity ofE1 cables.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 85: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Prerequisitel The NE equipment must be equipped with an E1 interface board, and the E1 port must

travel through the DDF before being connected to another device.l Service data configuration must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Laptop on which the LCT is installed

l BER tester

Procedure

Step 1 At the DDF, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU.

The BER tester displays the AIS alarm.

Figure 4-4 Connecting the BER tester

RX TXDDF

1234....

RX TX

BER tester

Step 2 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface .IF/RF Port Loopback to Disabled. For details, see Setting Automatic LoopbackRelease of an NE.

Step 3 Set the corresponding E1 port to outloop by using the Web LCT.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. Choose Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Outloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 4 Observe the BER tester.The BER tester does not display the AIS alarm.

Step 5 Release the outloop set in Step 3.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-43

Page 86: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 6 Observe the BER tester.The BER tester reports the AIS alarm.

Step 7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 to test all the other E1 ports.

----End

4.4.2 Testing Connectivity of E1 Cables with a Hand-Held ToolBy testing connectivity of E1 cables, you can check whether the E1 cables between the equipmentand the DDF are connected correctly, and whether the cables are in normal status. Whenperforming site commissioning with a hand-held tool, test the connectivity of E1 cables throughthe PRBS function enabled on an NE.

Prerequisitel An NE must be configured with an E1 interface board. The E1 ports on the E1 interface

board must be connected to another NE through the DDF.l The hand-held tool must be logged in to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsHand-held tools

Procedure

Step 1 Connect a hand-held tool to the OptiX RTN 620. For details, see 4.3.1 Connecting Hand-HeldTools to IDUs.

Step 2 On the DDF, perform a hardware loopback at the first E1 port on the IDU.

RX TXDDF

1234....

Step 3 Test the cable connectivity of the first port with the hand-held tool.1. When the hand-held tool is in the standby interface, press F3 to query the NE information.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 87: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

2. Select 6-E1 Cable Check and press Enter. Then, the tributary board selection interface isdisplayed.

3. Select the tributary board that is connected to the E1 port, and press Enter to test cableconnectivity.

4. Check the test result,Alarm Port ID does not include the first port.

5. Press any button to display the NE information query interface.

Step 4 Release the hardware loopback that is performed in Step 2.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to test cable connectivity at other ports.

----End

4.4.3 Testing Connectivity of Ethernet CablesBy testing connectivity of Ethernet cables, you can check whether the Ethernet cables are innormal status.

PrerequisiteThe Ethernet cables must be prepared.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsNetwork cable tester

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-45

Page 88: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Background InformationYou can also test connectivity of Ethernet cables by performing a loopback on the data ports(this method is applicable after the equipment is powered on). Specifically, use the Ethernetcable to be tested to connect any two data ports. If the LINK indicators of the two data ports areon, it indicates that the Ethernet cable is normal.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the Ethernet cable to the port of the network cable tester.

Figure 4-5 Testing the Ethernet cable

Step 2 Check the indicator of the network cable tester.

Ethernet Cable Type End A End B

Straight Through Cable The 1-8-G indicators turn onone after another.

The 1-8-G indicators turn on oneafter another.

Crossover cable The 1-8-G indicators turn onone after another.

The 3-6-1-4-5-2-7-8-G indicatorsturn on one after another.

Step 3 Connect the Ethernet cable that passes the test to the Ethernet port of the device.

----End

4.4.4 Testing Connectivity of Fiber JumpersBy testing connectivity of optical fibers, you can check whether the fiber jumpers between theequipment and the ODF are correctly connected and whether the fiber jumpers are in normalstatus.

PrerequisiteThe fiber jumpers must be installed and routed from the optical interface to the ODF.

On the power supply device side, the power switch must be turned on.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 89: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsOptical power meter, short fiber jumper

Precautions

DANGERWhen you check the connection of fiber jumpers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams.

Test Connection DiagramWhen you use an optical interface board to test connectivity of fiber jumpers, connect the fiberjumper to the optical power meter on the ODF and connect the fiber jumper to the TX port ofthe optical interface board on the chassis. Figure 4-6 shows the connection.

Figure 4-6 Connection diagram for testing the connectivity of fiber jumpers by using an opticalinterface board

TX RX

Fiber jumper connectedto the Tx port

ODF

External cable

Procedure

Step 1 On the chassis, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port of an optical interface board.

Step 2 Connect the optical power meter to the OUT port of the optical interface board with a short fiberjumper.

Step 3 Switch on the optical power meter and set the operating wavelength according to the opticalinterface type. The measured launched optical power of the optical interface board is A.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-47

Page 90: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 4 Insert the fiber jumper back to the TX port.

Step 5 On the ODF side, disconnect the fiber jumper from the TX port. Connect the fiber jumper to theoptical power meter. The measured optical power is B.

Step 6 Disconnect the fiber jumper from the corresponding TX port of the optical interface board. Theoptical power meter reads "LO" and does not receive optical signals.

Step 7 Compare the values of A and B.l If the difference between A and B is less than 1 dB, it indicates that the fiber jumper is

correctly connected and the attenuation of the fiber jumper is within the normal range.l If the difference between A and B is more than 1 dB, check and ensure that the fiber jumper

is in normal status and is correctly routed. Then, check and ensure that the fiber jumperterminal is clean.

CAUTIONIf the fiber jumper is connected through a flange, the difference between A and B is less than 2dB. Otherwise, you can infer that the fiber jumper is incorrectly connected or the attenuation ofthe fiber jumper is inappropriate. Check and ensure that the fiber jumper is in normal status andis correctly routed. Then, check and ensure that the fiber jumper terminal is clean.

Step 8 Check the fiber jumper that is connected to the RX port in the same manner.

Step 9 Recover the fiber jumper connections between the chassis and on the ODF.

Step 10 Repeat Steps 1 to 9 to check fiber jumper connections of the other optical interfaces.

----End

4.5 Aligning AntennasAligning antennas is the most important activity in site commissioning, and its result has a directimpact on the performance of radio links.

4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side LobeBefore you align the antennas, you should be familiar with the related knowledge of the mainlobe and side lobe.

4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized AntennasWhen you align single-polarized antennas, you need to align the main lobes of the antennas byadjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized AntennasWhen you align dual-polarized antennas, you need to align the main lobe of the antenna signalsby adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. You also need to adjust thefeed booms of the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets thespecified requirements.

4.5.1 Main Lobe and Side LobeBefore you align the antennas, you should be familiar with the related knowledge of the mainlobe and side lobe.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 91: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Definitions of the Main Lobe and Side LobeThe electric field strength of the radiated power of the antenna varies in space. The differencesof the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are the horizontalazimuth diagram for the horizontal section and the vertical azimuth diagram for the verticalsection. Figure 4-7 is a vertical azimuth diagram. There are many lobes in this figure. The lobewith the strongest radiated power is the main lobe. The other lobes are side lobes wherein thefirst side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.

Figure 4-7 Main lobe and side lobe

Main lobe

First side lobeSecond side lobe

Locating the Main LobeAntenna alignment involves making the main lobe of the local antenna aligned with the mainlobe of the opposite antenna. The purpose is to make the received signal strength of the oppositeantenna reach the maximum value.

The main lobe width of the microwave antenna is narrow, that is, between 0.6° and 3.7° generally.For instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at the working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth isonly 0.9° when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected,very small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe.

Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and fall of signal level. Whetherthe main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal peaks.Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal peak.

Figure 4-8 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentricrings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-49

Page 92: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 4-8 Horizontal section of the antenna

0o

a Horizontal section ofthe antenna

90o

180o

0o

90o

180o

Center of the main lobe

Outer edge of the main lobe, 3-10 dB lower than the main lobe

Trough between the main lobeand the first side lobe, 30 dBlower than the main lobeFirst side lobe, 20-25 dBlower than the main lobe

Trough between the first side lobeand the second side lobe, 30 dB ormore lower than the main lobe

Second side lobe, wheresignals are very weakb head-on view

Tracking PathSide lobe signal readings can be mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are tracked ondifferent elevation (or azimuth). Figure 4-9 shows a horizontal radio propagation model of theantenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the measured signallevel values of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port of the ODU.)

Figure 4-9 Three tracking paths

Signal levels for each path

31

2

B

7

4 5

6

A

B'

A'

C'C

A'A

B B'

C C'

Head-on view of tracking paths fordifferent elevations

24

6 7

1 3

5

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 93: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

l Line AA' represents that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The mainlobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuthof the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

l Line BB' represents that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe.The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than thesignal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may bemistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuthof the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust theelevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust theelevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

l Line CC' represents that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the mainlobe and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe atpoint 6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As aresult, points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correctmethod is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjustthe elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjustthe elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak at one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shownin Figure 4-10, a common error is to move the antenna left to right along line DD' or top tobottom along line EE' so that the three signal peaks of line AA' can appear. As a result, point 1may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust theelevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Severaladjustments are required so that the three signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjustthe elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9 until the peak signalappears.

Figure 4-10 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe

1 3

E E'

D

12

D'

D D'

E

E'

1 2

3

4.5.2 Aligning Single-Polarized AntennasWhen you align single-polarized antennas, you need to align the main lobes of the antennas byadjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisitel The NE commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of a radio link must be complete.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-51

Page 94: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

l The weather must be suitable for outdoor work. There should be no rain, snow or fogbetween stations.

l The on-site conditions must meet the requirements for an antenna to operate at a highaltitude and the personnel required to commission the antenna must be trained to work athigh altitudes

l The ATPC function must be disabled (the default status on the NE is Disabled).

l The AM function must be disabled (the default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Adjustable wrench

l Telescope, interphone, and socket-head wrench

l Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests), and north-stabilizedindicator.

Precautionsl If the radio link is configured in 1+1 protection mode and one antenna is used at each end,

power off the standby ODUs at both ends before aligning the antennas. After the antennasare aligned, power on the standby ODUs at both ends.

l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 SD mode, align the antennas as follows:

1. Power on the active ODUs at both ends. Ensure that they are powered on during thealignment.

2. Power off the standby ODUs at both ends. Then, align the main antennas at both ends.3. Power on the standby ODU at the local end. Retain the position of the main antenna

at the remote end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the local end.4. Power on the standby ODU at the remote end. Retain the position of the main antenna

at the local end, and adjust the diversity antenna at the remote end.l If the radio link is configured in 1+1 FD mode and two antennas are used at each end, align

the antennas as follows:

1. At both ends, power on the main ODUs, power off the standby ODUs, and align themain antennas.

2. At both ends, power off the main ODUs, power on the standby ODUs, and align thediversity antennas.

CAUTIONYou can adjust the azimuth and elevation of antennas by adjusting the related nuts or screws.For details, see the related installation guide.

ProcedureStep 1 Determine the azimuth of an antenna according to the installation position and height of the

antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position.

Step 2 Connect a multimeter to the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) port on the ODU at thelocal end and test the voltage value VBNC.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 95: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

TIP

It is recommended that you make the test line terminated with a BNC connector at one end in advancebecause it is more convenient to test the voltage value VBNC.

Figure 4-11 Testing the RSSI voltage by using a multimeter

Step 3 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of an antenna as follows:

1. Retain the position of the antenna at the remote end.

2. Use the multimeter to measure VBNC. At the local end, rotate the antenna widely in thehorizontal direction.When you rotate the antenna, the tested signal peaks may be as follows:

l Three signal peaks are tracked, for example, line AA' in Figure 4-9. In this case, adjustthe azimuth of the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9.

l Two signal peaks are tracked, for example, line BB' in Figure 4-9. In this case, adjustthe azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 4-9. Then,adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA'can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9.

l One signal peak is tracked, for example, line CC' in Figure 4-9. In this case, adjust theazimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7 as shown in Figure 4-9. Then,adjust the elevation of the antenna so that the three signal peaks in the case of line AA'can appear. Adjust the antenna to the peak position at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9.

3. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 as shown in Figure 4-9 until VBNCreaches the peak within the tracked range.

4. Adjust the antenna until VBNC reaches the peak value. Then, fix the antenna at the localend.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-53

Page 96: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTEWhen you tighten the antenna, ensure that VBNC remains the peak value.

Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peakvalue, tighten the antenna at the remote end.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at theremote end reach the peak value, tighten the antennas at both ends

Step 6 Use the multimeter to test VBNC at both ends. Obtain current RSL by referring to the relationcurve between VBNC of ODUs and RSLs at both ends.

NOTE

The curve diagram of VBNC and RSL is delivered in the carton of the ODU.

Actual RSL must be the same as planned by the network planning department.

NOTE

l If VBNC does not meet the requirements, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission SystemMaintenance Guide for handling the fault.

Step 7 Observe the ODU indicator on the IF board. If the ODU indicator blinks yellow, align theantennas.

Step 8 Tighten all the screws of the antennas.

NOTE

Use the multimeter to check the received value of RSSI. Avoid any fault in the alignment of antennas in theprocess of tightening the screws.

----End

4.5.3 Aligning Dual-Polarized AntennasWhen you align dual-polarized antennas, you need to align the main lobe of the antenna signalsby adjusting the azimuth and elevation of the antennas at both ends. You also need to adjust thefeed booms of the antennas so that the cross-polarization discrimination (XPD) meets thespecified requirements.

Prerequisitel The NE commissioning of the radio equipment at both ends of the radio link must be

complete.l The weather must be suitable for outdoor work. There should be no rain, snow or fog

between stations.l The on-site conditions must meet the requirements for the antenna to operate at a high

altitude and the personnel required to commission the antenna must be trained to work athigh altitudes

l The ATPC function must be disabled (the default status on the NE is Disabled).

l The AM function must be disabled (the default status on the NE is Disabled).

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Adjustable wrench

l Telescope, interphone, and socket-head wrench

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 97: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

l Multimeter (with a BNC connecter prepared at one end for future tests), and north-stabilizedindicator.

Procedure

Step 1 Power off the vertically polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, power on the horizontallypolarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and thus ensure that the antennas transmithorizontally polarized signals.

Step 2 Adjust the azimuth angle and elevation angle of the antennas at both ends by referring to 4.5.2Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas, and ensure that the main lobe of the horizontallypolarized signals is aligned with the antenna.

Step 3 Measure the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized signals at the local end.1. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the horizontally polarized

ODU.2. Calculate the RSL (P1) of the horizontally polarized received signals by referring to the

curve diagram in the ODU box.

Step 4 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signalsreaches the lower threshold (P2).1. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized

ODU.3. Calculate the RSL (P2) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagram

in the ODU box.4. Calculate the XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2).

If... Then...

The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) should not be less than30 dB.

Proceed to the next step.

The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) should not be less than30 dB.

Perform Step 5.

5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly untilthe signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD1 (XPD1 = P1 - P2) shouldnot be less than 30 dB.

Step 5 Record the angle (D1) of the current feed boom.

Step 6 Power off the horizontally polarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, power on the verticallypolarized ODUs at both ends of the radio link, and thus ensure that the antennas transmitvertically polarized signals.

Step 7 Measure the RSL (P3) of the vertically polarized signals at the local end by referring to Step3.

Step 8 Adjust the feed boom at the local end, and ensure that the RSL of the vertically polarized signalsreaches the lower threshold (P4).1. Power on the vertically polarized ODU at the local end.2. Use a multimeter to measure the signal level on the RSSI port of the vertically polarized

ODU.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-55

Page 98: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

3. Calculate the RSL (P4) of the vertically polarized signals by referring to the curve diagramin the ODU box.

4. Calculate the XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4).

If... Then...

The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should not be less than30 dB.

Proceed to the next step.

The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) should not be less than30 dB.

Perform Step 9.

5. Release the holder of the feed boom to some extent, and turn the feed boom slightly untilthe signal level reaches the lower threshold. The calculated XPD2 (XPD2 = P3 - P4) shouldnot be less than 30 dB.

Step 9 Record the angle (D2) of the current feed boom.

Step 10 Adjust the feed boom slightly (ranging from D1 to D2), and ensure that XPD1 and XPD2 arenot less than 30 dB.

NOTE

If D1 and D2 are the same, you need not adjust the feed boom.

Step 11 Tighten all the screws of the antennas.

NOTE

Use the multimeter to measure the received value of RSSI. Avoid any fault in the alignment of antennas in theprocess of tightening the screws.

----End

Related InformationIn the actual situation, you can align the dual-polarized antennas by measuring only the verticallypolarized signals.

4.6 Querying the Status of Radio LinksAfter aligning the antennas, you need to query the status of radio links and ensure that the radiolinks are in normal status.

PrerequisiteThe antennas must be aligned.

Procedure

Step 1 Observe the Link indicator on the IF board.

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 99: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

STAT SRV

LINK

ODU RM

TACT

1. If the Link indicator on the IF board is on and green, it indicates that the radio link is normal.2. If the Link indicator on the IF board is on (red), check whether the data configuration of

the ODU is correct and whether the antennas are aligned.

----End

4.7 Querying DCN StatusThe NMS manages NEs through DCN channels. Querying the radio links through the HOPmanagement function on the Web LCT, you can check whether the DCN of radio links runsnormally.

Prerequisitel The basic data of NEs on the entire network must be configured.

l Aligning the antennas must be complete.

l The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsLaptop on which the LCT is installed

Procedure

Step 1 Select an NE in Object Tree. Choose Configuration > Link Configuration from Function Tree.

Step 2 In the IF/ODU Configuration tab, select and right-click the required IF board. Then, chooseHOP Management from the shortcut menu.l If the HOP Management window is displayed as in Figure 4-12, it indicates that the DCN

of radio links runs normally.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 4 Site Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-57

Page 100: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 4-12 HOP Management

l If the dialog box is displayed as The opposite NE does not exist, then check the data

configuration.

----End

4 Site Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

4-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 101: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

5 System Commissioning Guide

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to perform all system commissioning items.

5.1 Configuring the Network-Wide Service DataAfter the site commissioning is performed for each hop of radio links, the ECC communicationbetween NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the NMS, and the network-wide service data can be configured.

5.2 Testing E1 ServicesBy testing E1 services, you can check whether E1 services are available on radio links.

5.3 Testing Ethernet ServicesBy testing Ethernet services, you can check whether Ethernet services are available on radiolinks.

5.4 Testing AM SwitchingBy testing AM switching, you can check whether AM switching is normal on radio links thatare enabled with the AM function.

5.5 Testing Protection SwitchingBy testing protection switching, you can check whether the protection switching is normal onradio links.

5.6 Checking the Clock StatusBy checking the clock status for each NE, you can ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on aradio network are synchronized.

5.7 Testing the 24-Hour BERYou can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing the24-hour BER.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

Page 102: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

5.1 Configuring the Network-Wide Service DataAfter the site commissioning is performed for each hop of radio links, the ECC communicationbetween NEs is normal. In this case, an NE can be accessed by using the NMS, and the network-wide service data can be configured.

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search MethodThe Web LCT can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE according to theIP address of the gateway NE or the IP address range of the gateway NE. In addition, the WebLCT can create the NEs in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, thismethod is quicker and more reliable.

5.1.2 Logging In to an NEAfter an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

5.1.3 Changing NE IDsThis section describes how to change NE IDs according to the engineering plan to ensure thateach NE ID is unique. The modification does not affect services.

5.1.4 Changing NE NamesTo accurately identify an NE in the Main Topology, you need to name the NE according to thegeographical location or the equipment connected to the NE.

5.1.5 Setting NE Communication ParametersThe communication parameters of an NE include the IP address and extended ID of the NE, thegateway IP address, NSAP address, and the subnet mask.

5.1.6 Configuring Logical BoardsIf the logical board corresponding to a physical board is not added in the slot layout, add thelogical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in theslot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

5.1.7 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection GroupIf the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.

5.1.8 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio LinkBy configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link, you can configure the IF/ODUinformation that is frequently used by the radio link.

5.1.9 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point ServicesIn a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one servicesink.

5.1.10 Configuring Clock SourcesThis section describes how to configure clock sources according to the planned clocksynchronization scheme so that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.

5.1.11 Configuring the OrderwireThe orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the networkmaintenance personnel can use.

5.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search MethodThe Web LCT can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE according to theIP address of the gateway NE or the IP address range of the gateway NE. In addition, the Web

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 103: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

LCT can create the NEs in batches. Compared with the method of manually creating NEs, thismethod is quicker and more reliable.

PrerequisiteThe NEs must gain the access to the computer where the Web LCT software is installed.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

ContextYou can create an NE by searching for the NE and then adding the NE on the Web LCT. Inaddition, you can create an NE by adding the NE manually. Generally, the NE ID is not knownduring initial NE configuration. Therefore, the searching method is used to create an NE in mostcases.

Procedure

Step 1 In NE List, click NE Search.Then, the Search NE dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Optional: Set Domain to 129.9.255.255, and click Search.

NOTE

During initial configuration, Domain is 129.9.255.255 by default. After the gateway NE IP address of thesearched NE is changed, you need to change the value of Domain.

Step 3 After the Web LCT finds the NEs to be managed, click End Search.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

Page 104: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 4 Select the NE that needs to be added and click Add NE.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the NE is added successfully.

Step 5 Click OK.A new NE is already added to the NE list.

Step 6 Click Cancel.

----End

5.1.2 Logging In to an NEAfter an NE is created, you need to log in to the NE before managing the NE.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The NEs to be managed must be created in the NE List.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE List, select the target NE and click NE Login.TIP

You can select more than one NE at one time.

The NE Login dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Enter User Name and Password. Then, click OK.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 105: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

l The default User Name is lct.

l The default Password of user lct is password.

Login Status of the NE in the NE List changes to Logged In. Alarm Status of the NE is changedfrom Unknown to the current alarm status of the NE.

Step 3 Click NE Explorer.The NE Explorer is displayed.

TIP

To quickly start the NE Explorer, double-click the NE to be managed in the NE list.

TIP

l Check the legend to learn the specific meanings of different colors and symbols in the slot layoutdiagram.

l Click to fold/unfold the legend.

----End

Example

Table 5-1 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

User Name - lct This parameter specifies the name of theuser. This parameter can take the defaultvalue in the case of initial login.

Password - - The default password of user lct ispassword.

Use same username andpassword to login

SelectedDeselected

Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter UserName and Password to log in to all theselected NEs.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

Page 106: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Use the user nameand password thatwas used last time

SelectedDeselected

Deselected When this parameter is selected, enter UserName and Password that were used for thelatest login to log in to the NE.

5.1.3 Changing NE IDsThis section describes how to change NE IDs according to the engineering plan to ensure thateach NE ID is unique. The modification does not affect services.

PrerequisiteThe NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > NEAttribute from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Modify NE ID.The Modify NE ID dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set a new ID for the NE.

Step 4 Click OK.Then, a dialog box is displayed. Click OK.

----End

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 107: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Example

Table 5-2 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

New ID 1 to 49135 - l The new ID refers to the basic ID. Whenthe extended ID is not used, the basic IDof an NE within any network that ismanaged by an NMS must be unique.

l Set this parameter according to the DCNplanning information.

New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l When the number of existing NEs doesnot exceed the range represented by thebasic ID, do not modify the extended ID.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

NOTE

The NE ID has 24 bits. The highest eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended ID) and the lowest 16bits represent the basic ID. For example, if the ID of an NE is 0x090001, the subnet ID of the NE is 9 and thebasic ID is 1.

PostrequisiteIn the case of the OptiX RTN 620, you only need to close the NE Explorer and then re-log in tothe NE, if the IP address does not change accordingly after the NE ID changes; You need todelete the original NE, create an NE, and then log in to the NE, if the IP address of the NEchanges after the NE ID changes. Before the IP address of the NE is changed manually, the IPaddress changes accordingly if the NE ID changes. After the IP address of the NE is changedmanually, the IP address does not change accordingly if the NE ID changes.

5.1.4 Changing NE NamesTo accurately identify an NE in the Main Topology, you need to name the NE according to thegeographical location or the equipment connected to the NE.

PrerequisiteThe NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > NEAttribute from the Function Tree.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

Page 108: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 2 Enter the name of the NE in Name.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

5.1.5 Setting NE Communication ParametersThe communication parameters of an NE include the IP address and extended ID of the NE, thegateway IP address, NSAP address, and the subnet mask.

Prerequisite

The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Communication >Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Set the communication parameters of the NE.

Step 3 Click Apply.

----End

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 109: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Example

Table 5-3 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

IP - Before delivery, theIP address of the NEis set to 129.9.0.x.The letter x indicatesthe basic ID.

In the HWECC solution, an IP address is setaccording to the following rules:l The IP address, subnet mask, and default

gateway of the gateway NE must meet theplanning requirements of the externalDCN.

l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IPaddress must be in the same networksegment.

l The IP address of other NEs must be setaccording to the NE ID. In this example,the IP address of an NE must be set in theformat of 0x81000000+ID. That is, if theID is 0x090001, the IP address must beset to 129.9.0.1.

Gateway IP - 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0

Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when thenumber of actual NEs does not exceed therange permitted by the basic NE ID.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

NSAP Address - - This parameter is valid only when the OSIover DCC solution is applied. Thisparameter is used to set only the area ID ofan NSAP address. The other parts of theNSAP address are automatically generatedby the NE.

Connection Mode CommonSecurity SSL

Common The communication between the client andthe server is encrypted if this parameter isset to Security SSL.

5.1.6 Configuring Logical BoardsIf the logical board corresponding to a physical board is not added in the slot layout, add thelogical board in the slot layout. If the physical board is inconsistent with the logical board in theslot layout, delete the inconsistent logical board and add the correct logical board.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l All the boards must be installed correctly.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

Page 110: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

ContextThe NE software manages a physical board by considering the physical board as one or morelogical boards. In the OptiX RTN 620:

l An SCC physical board is considered as a logical SCC and a logical EOW board. The slotnumber of the logical SCC board is 2, and the slot number of the logical EOW is 21.

l Other physical boards of the IDU are considered as the logical boards with the same names.The slot numbers of the logical boards are the same as the slot numbers of the correspondingphysical boards.

An ODU is considered as an ODU logical board. The ODU logical slot number is 10 plus theslot number of the IF board connected to the ODU.

The STAT indicator on the physical IDU board will be lit only if the logical IDU board matcheswith the physical IDU board.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Slot Layout tab and click Add Logical Boards.

Based on the slot layout, the NE automatically configures the logical boards that are requiredbut still not be configured for certain physical boards.

Step 2 Optional: Right-click the slots in which boards are to be added, and select Add xxx. "xxx" refersto the boards to be added.

NOTE

Add the PXC board before you add the IF boards and service boards.

Manually adding the logical boards applies to the cases when relevant data need to be configured before thephysical boards are installed.

Step 3 Optional: Right-click the slots in which boards are to be deleted, and select Delete.Delete the services, clock, orderwire and protections on the boards before you delete the boards.

----End

5.1.7 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection GroupIf the radio link adopts 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection, you need to create the corresponding IF 1+1 protection group.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 111: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the IF 1+1 Protection tab.

Step 3 Click New.Then, the Create IF 1+1 Protection dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the parameters of the IF 1+1 protection.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

Page 112: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Example

Table 5-4 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Working Mode HSBFDSD

HSB l In 1+1 HSB protection mode, the systemprovides a 1+1 hot standby configurationfor the IF board and ODU at both ends ofeach hop of a radio link to provideprotection.

l In 1+1 FD protection mode, the systemuses two channels that have a frequencyspacing between them, to transmit andreceive the same signal. The remote endselects signals from the two receivedsignals. With the 1+1 FD protection, theimpact of the fading on signaltransmission is reduced.

l In 1+1 SD protection mode, the systemuses two antennas that have a spacedistance between them, to receive thesame signal. The equipment selectssignals from the two received signals.With the 1+1 SD protection, the impactof the fading on signal transmission isreduced.

l The 1+1 FD protection mode and 1+1 SDprotection mode are compatible with the1+1 HSB switching function.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information.

Revertive Mode RevertiveNon-Revertive

Revertive l When this parameter is set to Revertive,the NE that is in the switching statereleases the switching and enables theformer working channel to return to thenormal state some time after the formerworking channel is restored to normal.

l When this parameter is set to Non-Revertive, the NE that is in the switchingstate keeps the current state unchangedunless another switching occurs eventhough the former working channel isrestored to normal.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 113: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

WTR Time (s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter is valid only whenRevertive Mode is set to Revertive.

l When the time after the former workingchannel is restored to normal reaches theset wait-to-restore (WTR) time, arevertive switching occurs.

l It is recommended that this parametertakes the default value.

Enable ReverseSwitching

EnableDisable

Enable l When both the main IF board and thestandby IF board at the sink end reportservice alarms, they send the alarms to thesource end by using the MWRDIoverhead in the microwave frame. Whenthis parameter at the source end is set toEnable and the reverse switchingconditions are met, the IF 1+1 protectionswitching occurs at the source end.

l This parameter is valid only whenWorking Mode is set to HSB or SD.

l Generally, if Working Mode is set toHSB, it is recommended that you set thisparameter to Disabled; if WorkingMode is set to SD, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to Enabled.

Working Board IF ports - l In 1+1 FD/SD mode, two IF boards mustbe installed as a pair in slots 5 and 7 (theIF board in slot 5 is recommended to bethe main board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IFboard in slot 6 is recommended to be themain board).

l In 1+1 HSB mode, the IF boards can beinstalled in slots 5-8. It is recommendedthat you install two IF boards in a pair inslots 5 and 7 (the IF board in slot 5 is themain board) or in slots 6 and 8 (the IFboard in slot 6 is the main board).

Protection Board

NOTE

The parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time (s), and Enable Reverse Switching mustbe set to the same values at both ends of a radio link hop.

Postrequisitel In the case of 1+1 HSB protection and 1+1 SD protection, you need to configure the IF/

ODU information of the main radio link later. The standby radio link automatically copies

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

Page 114: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

the related information of the active microwave link except the transmission status of theODU.

l In the case of 1+1 FD protection, you need to configure the IF/ODU information of themain radio link and the information of the standby ODU later. The standby radio linkautomatically copies the IF information of the main radio link.

NOTE

The default TX Status of an ODU is Unmute. Therefore, you need not configure the TX Status of the standbyODU after you create an IF 1+1 protection group.

5.1.8 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio LinkBy configuring the IF/ODU information of a radio link, you can configure the IF/ODUinformation that is frequently used by the radio link.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The IF boards and the ODUs to which the IF boards are connected must be added.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Precautionsl In 1+1 HSB/SD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In

this case, you need configure only the IF/ODU information of the main equipment.l In 1+1 FD protection mode, one protection group corresponds to one radio link. In this

case, you need configure the IF/ODU information of the main equipment and the ODUinformation of the standby equipment.

l In the case of XPIC radio links, one XPIC workgroup corresponds to two radio links. TheIF/ODU information of the radio links must be configured in the XPIC workgroup.

l In the case of N+1 protection mode, one N+1 protection group corresponds to N+1 radiolinks and the IF/ODU information of the N+1 radio links must be set separately.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > LinkConfiguration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

Step 3 Click an IF board icon or ODU icon.Then, the system displays the IF/ODU information of the radio link to which the IF board orODU to which the IF board is connected belongs.

Step 4 Configure the corresponding IF information of the radio link.

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Configure the corresponding ODU information of the radio link.

Step 7 Click Apply.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 115: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

You need to click Apply after you set the IF information of the radio link and click Apply after you set the ODUinformation of the radio link.

----End

Example

Table 5-5 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK2,4E1,3.5MHz,16QAM3,8E1,14MHz,QPSK4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM5,16E1,28MHz,QPSK6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM8,E3,28MHz,QPSK9,E3,14MHz,16QAM10,22E1,14MHz,32QAM11,26E1,14MHz,64QAM12,32E1,14MHz,128QAM13,35E1,28MHz,16QAM14,44E1,28MHz,32QAM15,53E1,28MHz,64QAM16,5E1,7MHz,QPSK17,10E1,14MHz,QPSK18,2E1,3.5MHz,QPSK

- l This parameter indicates the radio workmode in "work mode, service capacity,channel spacing, modulation mode"format.

l The IF1A/IF1B board supports radioworking modes 1-15 and the IF0A/IF0Bboard supports radio working modes 5and 16-18. The IFX board supports radioworking mode 7.

l The IFH2 board on the IDU 620 does notsupport Work Mode.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information. The radioworking modes of the IF boards at bothends of the radio link must be the same.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

Page 116: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Link ID 1 to 4094 - l As the identifier of a radio link, thisparameter is used to preventmisconnection of radio links betweensites.

l If this parameter is different fromReceived Link ID, the NE reports theMW_LIM alarm and inserts the AIS intothe downstream.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information. Each radiolink of an NE must have a unique link ID,and the link IDs at both ends of a radiolink must be the same.

Received Link ID - - This parameter displays the received linkID.NOTE

The link ID at the local end must the same as thelink ID at the opposite end.

ATPC EnableStatus

EnabledDisabled

- l This parameter specifies whether theATPC function is enabled. Thisparameter indicates whether the ATPCfunction is enabled. The ATPC functionensures that the transmit power of thetransmitter automatically traces thechanges of the receive level at the receiveend, within the ATPC controlled range.

l In the case of areas where fast fading issevere, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to Disabled.

l During commissioning, set thisparameter to Disabled to ensure that thetransmit power is not changed. Aftercommissioning, re-set the ATPCattributes.

ATPC Threshold(dBm)

- - This parameter displays the permittedATPC adjustment range.

ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm)

-75.0 to -20.0 -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPCupper threshold and the ATPC lowerthreshold to a value for the expectedreceive power.

l It is recommended that you set ATPCUpper Threshold(dBm) to the sum ofthe planned central value between theATPC upper threshold and the ATPClower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPCLower Threshold(dBm) to the

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 117: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm)

-35.0 to -90.0 -70.0 difference between the planned centralvalue between the ATPC upper thresholdand the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.

l You can set the ATPC upper thresholdonly when ATPC Automatic Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.

ATPC AutomaticThreshold EnableStatus

EnabledDisabled

Disabled l This parameter specifies whether theATPC automatic threshold function isenabled.

l If this parameter is set to Enabled, theequipment automatically uses the presetATPC upper and lower thresholdsaccording to the work mode of the radiolink.

l If this parameter is set to Disabled, youneed to manually set ATPC UpperThreshold(dBm) and ATPC LowerThreshold(dBm).

TX Frequency(MHz)

0 to 4294967.295 - l The parameter specifies the channelcenter frequency.

l The value of this parameter must not beless than the sum of the lower transmitfrequency limit supported by the ODUand a half of the channel spacing, andmust not be more than the differencebetween the upper transmit frequencylimit supported by the ODU and a half ofthe channel spacing.

l The difference between the transmitfrequencies of the ODUs at both ends ofa radio link is a T/R spacing.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information.

Range of TXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter specifies the transmitfrequency range of an ODU.

Actual TXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter displays the actual transmitfrequency of an ODU.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

Page 118: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Actual RXFrequency(MHz)

- - This parameter displays the actual receivefrequency of an ODU.

T/R Spacing(MHZ)

0 to 4294967.295 - l This parameter indicates the spacingbetween the TX frequency and receivefrequency of the ODU. If Station Typeof the ODU is TX high, the transmitfrequency is one T/R spacing higher thanthe receive power. If Station Type of theODU is TX low, the transmit frequencyis one T/R spacing lower than the receivepower.

l If the ODU supports only one T/Rspacing, set this parameter to 0,indicating that the T/R spacing supportedby the ODU is used.

l The T/R spacing of the ODU should beset to the same value at both the ends ofa radio link.

Actual T/RSpacing(MHZ)

- - This parameter displays the actual T/Rspacing of a board.

TX Power(dBm) -10.0 to +35.0 - l The value of this parameter must notexceed the rated power range supportedby the ODU.

l The transmit power of the ODU must beset to the same value at both ends of aradio link.

l Set this parameter according to theservice planning information.

Range of TX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter specifies the transmit powerrange of an ODU.

Actual TX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter displays the actual transmitpower of an ODU.

Actual RX Power(dBm)

- - This parameter displays the actual receivepower of an ODU.

TX Status muteunmute

- l When Transmission Status is set tomute, the transmitter of the ODU doesnot work but the ODU can normallyreceive radio signals.

l When Transmission Status is set tounmute, the ODU normally transmitsand receives radio signals.

l This parameter, generally, takes thedefault value.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 119: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Actual TX Status muteunmute

- This parameter displays the transmissionstatus of the RF transmitter.

Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter displays the operatingfrequency band of an ODU.

Equip Type - - This parameter displays the type of an ODU.

Station Type - - This parameter displays the type of a site.

Produce SN - - This parameter displays the productionserial number and the manufacturer code ofan ODU.

TransmissionPower Type

- - This parameter displays the output powerlevel of an ODU.

NOTE

The ATPC attributes must be set to the same at both the ends of a radio link.

5.1.9 Creating Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point ServicesIn a cross-connection of point-to-point services, one service source corresponds to one servicesink.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The boards where the source and the sink are located must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration > Cross-Connection Configuration from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Optional: Click Scheme to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-connection.

Step 3 Click New.Then, the Create SDH Service dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Configure the cross-connections of the service.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

Page 120: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 5 Click OK.

NOTE

l When you create a cross-connection whose source or sink is the timeslots of an IF board, the creation mayfail due to the limited number of licenses.

l The calculation of the required number of licenses is based on the total number of service timeslots of allthe IF boards that are involved in cross-connections. In the case of the cross-connections of VC-3 or VC-4services, the VC-3 or VC-4 services need to be converted into E1 services that have the same capacity. Forexample, the cross-connections of one E3 service from a PL3 board to an IF board require the number oflicenses that are used for 21xE1. One VC-3 pass-through service between two IF boards requires the numberof licenses that are used for 42xE1. The 8xE1 SNCP services from two IF boards to one PO1 board requirethe number of licenses that are used for 16xE1.

----End

Example

Table 5-6 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Level VC12VC3VC4

VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of thecross-connections.

l In the case of E1 services or data servicesin bound VC-12 paths, set this parameterto VC12.

l In the case of E3/T3 services or dataservices in bound VC-3 paths, set thisparameter to VC3.

l If all the services in a VC-4 path arepassed through the NE, set this parameterto VC4.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 121: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Direction UnidirectionalBidirectional

Bidirectional l When this parameter is set toUnidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source tothe service sink only.

l When this parameter is set toBidirectional, create the cross-connections from the service source tothe service sink and from the service sinkto the service source.

l It is recommended that you set thisparameter to Bidirectional.

Source - - This parameter specifies the slot where theservice source is located.

Source Port - - This parameter specifies the interface wherethe service source is located.

Source VC4 - - This parameter specifies the number of theVC-4 path where the service source islocated.

Source TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter indicates the timeslotrange corresponding to the servicesource.

l This parameter can be set to a value ormultiple values. When this parameter isset to multiples values, use "," to separateeach value and use "-" to indicatesequential numbers. For example,"1,3-6" indicates 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

l If the IF board works in the PDH mode,E1s/E3s 1-n transmitted over radiocorrespond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1-n. Ports 1-n of E1 interface boards andE3/T3 interface boards correspond toVC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1-n.

l The E1s 1-75 transmitted on the IFH2board correspond to the 1-63 VC-12timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 1-12VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4.

Sink - - This parameter specifies the slot where theservice ink is located.

Sink Port - - This parameter specifies the port where theservice sink is located.

Sink VC4 - - This parameter specifies the number of theVC-4 where the service sink is located.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

Page 122: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Sink TimeslotRange(e.g.1,3-6)

- - l This parameter indicates the timeslotrange corresponding to the service sink.

l This parameter can be set to a value ormultiple values. When this parameter isset to multiples values, use "," to separateeach value and use "-" to indicatesequential numbers. For example,"1,3-6" indicates 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

l If the IF board works in the PDH mode,E1s/E3s 1-n transmitted over radiocorrespond to VC-12/VC-3 timeslots 1-n. Ports 1-n of E1 interface boards andE3/T3 interface boards correspond toVC-12/VC3 timeslots 1-n.

l The E1s 1-75 transmitted on the IFH2board correspond to the 1-63 VC-12timeslots of the first VC-4 and the 1-12VC-12 timeslots of the second VC-4.

5.1.10 Configuring Clock SourcesThis section describes how to configure clock sources according to the planned clocksynchronization scheme so that all the NEs on the network trace the same clock.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The PXC board and the boards that input and output clock sources must be added in theSlot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration >Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Create.Then, the Add Clock Source dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Select the clock sources.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 123: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

TIP

By pressing the Ctrl key on the keyboard, you can select multiple clock sources at one time.

Step 4 Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: Repeat steps Step 2 to Step 4 to add other clock sources.

Step 6 Optional: Select a clock source and click or to adjust the priority of aclock source.The clock priorities levels are arranged in a descending order from the first row to the last row.The internal clock source is always of the lowest priority.

Step 7 Optional: Set External Clock Source Mode and Synchronous Status Byte for the externalclock sources.

Step 8 Click Apply.

----End

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

Page 124: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter DescriptionParameter Value Range Default Value Description

Clock Source - - l External clock source 1 indicates theexternal clock source from the interfaceon the PXC board in slot 1. External clocksource 2 indicates the external clocksource from the interface on the PXCboard in slot 3.

l IFH2-1(SDH) indicates the microwaveclock source.

l IFH2-2(ETH) indicates the clock sourceof the synchronous Ethernet.

l The internal clock source is always of thelowest priority and indicates that the NEworks in the free-run mode.

l Determine the clock sources and thecorresponding clock source prioritylevels according to the clocksynchronization scheme.

External ClockSource Mode

2 Mbit/s2 MHz

2 Mbit/s l This parameter specifies the type of theexternal clock source signal.

l Set this parameter depending on theexternal clock signal. The external clocksignal is generally a 2 Mbit/s signal.

SynchronousStatus Byte

SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid only whenExternal Clock Source Mode is set to2Mbit/s.

l This parameter indicates which bit of theTS0 in odd frames of the external clocksignal is used to transmit the SSM.

l This parameter needs to be set only whenthe SSM or extended SSM is enabled.The external clock sources generallytransmit the SSM over the SA4.

5.1.11 Configuring the OrderwireThe orderwire for an NE provides a dedicated communication channel that the networkmaintenance personnel can use.

PrerequisiteThe NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 125: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

ContextThe communication channel must be available for activating the orderwire.

l When an SDH optical/electrical line exists between two NEs, the overhead byte E1 or E2in the SDH frames can be used as the orderwire communication channel.

l When a radio link exists between two NEs, a fixed overhead byte in the radio frames canbe used as the orderwire communication channel.

l When no SDH optical/electrical line and microwave link exists between two NEs, connectthe external clock ports or synchronous data ports of the two NEs to provide the orderwirecommunication channel.

The OptiX RTN 620 supports the group call function of the orderwire. When an OptiX RTN620 dials the orderwire group call number 888, the orderwire phones of all the OptiX RTN620s in the orderwire subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 620 answers the phone call, the otherOptiX RTN 620s stop ringing, that is, the group call becomes a point-to-point call between twoNEs.

Procedure

Step 1 Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Orderwirefrom the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click the General tab.

Step 3 Configure the orderwire information.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

Page 126: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 4 Click the Apply.

Step 5 Optional: Modify the orderwire occupied overhead bytes.

1. Click the Advanced tab.

2. Configure Orderwire Occupied Bytes.

3. Click the Apply.

----End

Example

Table 5-7 Parameters

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Call Waiting Time(s)

1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting timeafter the local station dials the number. Ifthe calling station does not receive theresponse message from the called stationwithin the call waiting time, itautomatically removes thecommunication connection.

l If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwiresubnet, it is recommended that you setthis parameter to 5s. If more than 30nodes exist in the orderwire subnet, it isrecommended that you set this parameterto 9s.

l Set the same call waiting time for all theNEs.

Phone 1 100 to99999999 101 l This parameter indicates the orderwirephone number of the local station.

l The length of the orderwire phonenumber of each NE should be the same.It is recommended that the phone numberconsists of three numerics.

l The orderwire phone number of each NEshould be unique. It is recommended thatthe phone numbers are allocated from101 for the NEs according to the NE IDs.

l The orderwire phone number cannot beset to the group call number 888 andcannot start with 888.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 127: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Orderwire port Line portsexternal clock portF1 port

- l This parameter indicates the ports thatcan transmit the orderwire information.

l The OptiX RTN 620 does not supportconference calls and thus allows the linesthat transmit the orderwire information toform a loop.

l If the radio link between two nodes isconfigured with 1+1 protection, only theline port of the main IF board need to beused as the orderwire port.

l If multiple links (for example, configuredwith XPIC or N+1 protection) existbetween two nodes, the line portscorresponding to all the links need to beused as the orderwire ports.

l When orderwire communication isimplemented by interconnecting the twoNEs through the external clock ports, theexternal clock ports need to be used as theorderwire ports.

l When orderwire communication isimplemented by interconnecting the twoNEs through the synchronous data ports,the F1 port need to be used as theorderwire port.

OrderwireOccupied Bytes

E1E2

E1 l This parameter indicates the overheadbyte that is used to transmit the orderwireinformation.

l Regardless the parameter value, the radiolink uses a fixed self-defined overheadbyte to transmit the orderwireinformation. Hence, this parametershould be set according to the occupiedSDH overhead bytes in the ordinarySDH.

5.2 Testing E1 ServicesBy testing E1 services, you can check whether E1 services are available on radio links.

5.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER TesterIf a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test E1 services.

5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Through PRBSIf no BER tester is available, you can test the E1 service by using the PRBS test system embeddedin the equipment.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

Page 128: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

5.2.1 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER TesterIf a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test E1 services.

PrerequisiteThe NE equipment must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be transmittedthrough the DDF.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l BER tester

Procedure

Step 1 On the DDF at the central site, connect the BER tester to the first E1 port of the IDU.

The BER tester displays the AIS alarm.

Figure 5-1 Connecting the BER Tester

RX TXDDF

1234....

RX TX

BER tester

Step 2 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 3 On the Web LCT, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 4 Test the bit errors for two minutes.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 129: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

There are no bit errors.

Step 5 Release the inloop set in Step 3.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 6 Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 to test all the other E1 ports.

----End

5.2.2 Testing E1 Services Through PRBSIf no BER tester is available, you can test the E1 service by using the PRBS test system embeddedin the equipment.

Prerequisitel The NE equipment must be configured with E1 services, and the E1 services must be

transmitted through the DDF.l The communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Precautions

CAUTIONl When a PRBS test is performed, the services carried on the tested path are interrupted.

l The PRBS test can be performed only in a unidirectional manner and on one path at a time.

Procedure

Step 1 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 2 On the Web LCT, perform an inloop for the corresponding E1 port at the remote site.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-29

Page 130: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 3 At the central site, on the Web LCT, select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

Step 4 In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PRBS Test.

Step 5 Select the first E1 port, and then set the following PRBS-related parameters:l Direction: Cross

l Duration: 120-180 seconds

l Measured in Time: seconds

Step 6 Click Start to Test.The system displays a dialog box indicating The operation may interrupt the service, Areyou sure to continue?

Step 7 Click OK.

Step 8 When the Progress column is 100%, click Query to check the test result.The curve diagram should be green.

Step 9 Release the inloop set in Step 2.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 10 Repeat Step 2 through Step 9 to test all other E1 ports.

----End

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 131: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

5.3 Testing Ethernet ServicesBy testing Ethernet services, you can check whether Ethernet services are available on radiolinks.

5.3.1 Testing Ethernet Services by Using the LB FunctionWhen both ends of an Ethernet service support ETH-OAM, the LB function is preferred to testthe Ethernet service.5.3.2 Testing Ethernet Services by Using the Ping FunctionWhen only one end of an Ethernet service supports the ETH-OAM function, the ping functionis preferred to test the Ethernet service.5.3.3 Testing Ethernet Services by Using LaptopsWhen neither end of the Ethernet service supports the ETH-OAM function, you can checkEthernet service by using laptops.

5.3.1 Testing Ethernet Services by Using the LB FunctionWhen both ends of an Ethernet service support ETH-OAM, the LB function is preferred to testthe Ethernet service.

PrerequisiteEthernet services must be configured between sites. Creating the Maintenance Domain(MD), creating the Maintenance Association (MA), and creating the MaintenanceAssociation End Point (MEP) must be complete.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

ContextEMS6 and EFP6 support ETH-OAM.

Test Connection DiagramThe following test procedure considers the Ethernet service between PORT1 on NE1 and PORT2on NE2 as an example, as shown in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services

NE 1 NE 2

PORT 1 PORT 2

Microwave networking

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-31

Page 132: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

An Ethernet link is available from PORT1 on NE1 to PORT2 on NE2. In addition, the MD, MA,and MEP are configured.

Procedure

Step 1 In NE Explorer of NE1, select an Ethernet board, and then choose Configuration > EthernetMaintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the MD, MA, and MEP that correspond to PORT1, and click OAM Operation.

Step 3 Select Start LB.The LB Test window is displayed.

Step 4 Enter the MP ID of NE2 in LB Sink MP ID.

Step 5 Click Start LB.

Step 6 Check Test Result.The test results should meet the service requirements.

----End

5.3.2 Testing Ethernet Services by Using the Ping FunctionWhen only one end of an Ethernet service supports the ETH-OAM function, the ping functionis preferred to test the Ethernet service.

Prerequisitel An Ethernet service must be configured between sites.

l The maintenance domain, maintenance association, and maintenance point must be createdfor the NE that supports the ETH-OAM function. For details of the creation, see Creating

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 133: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Maintenance Domain, Creating Maintenance Association, and Creating MaintenancePoint.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

Test Connection Diagram

The following test procedure considers the Ethernet service between PORT1 on NE1 and PORT2on NE2 as an example, as shown in Figure 5-3. Wherein, NE1 supports the ETH-OAM function,and is configured with the maintenance domain, maintenance association, and maintenancepoint.

Figure 5-3 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services

NE 1 NE 2PORT 1 PORT 2

Microwave networking

10.1.1.510.1.1.2

Precautions

If NE2 is not connected to an Ethernet board or you are not aware of the IP address of the client-side equipment, you must connect the Ethernet service port of the Ethernet board to the ETHport of the SCC board. If TAG of the Ethernet board is set to Tag Aware, see Configuring theExternal Port of the Ethernet Board to set the TAG of the Ethernet board to Access, and toset Default VLAN ID to the VLAN ID of the accessed service.

Procedure

Step 1 In NE Explorer of NE1, select an Ethernet board, and then choose Configuration > EthernetMaintenance > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select the maintenance domain, maintenance association, and maintenance point that correspondto PORT1, and click OAM Operation.

Step 3 Select Start Ping.The Start Ping window is displayed.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-33

Page 134: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 4 In Send Mode, select Burst Mode.

Step 5 In IP Address configuration, enter Destination Ip address and Local IP Address.

NOTE

If the Ethernet cable is connected to the ETH port of the SCC board, Destination Ip address is the IPaddress of the NE.

l Destination Ip address: indicates the IP address of the client-side equipment, which is10.1.1.5.

l Local IP Address: indicates the IP address that is not used on the network segment of thedestination IP address. In this example, this parameter takes the value 10.1.1.244.

Step 6 Click Start Ping.In Detail, check whether the test result meets the service requirement.

----End

5.3.3 Testing Ethernet Services by Using LaptopsWhen neither end of the Ethernet service supports the ETH-OAM function, you can checkEthernet service by using laptops.

PrerequisiteAn Ethernet service must be configured between sites.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l Laptops

Test Connection DiagramThe following test procedure considers the Ethernet service between PORT1 on NE1 and PORT2on NE2 as an example, as shown in Figure 5-4.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 135: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 5-4 Networking diagram for testing Ethernet services

NE 1 NE 2PORT 1 PORT 2

Microwave networking

10.1.1.2 10.1.1.5

129.9.9.1 129.9.9.2

Precautionsl If the working mode of the Ethernet board is different from the working mode of the network

adapter (the working mode of the network adapter is auto-negotiation by default), seeConfiguring the External Port of the Ethernet Board to set the working mode of thetest port to the same as the working mode of the network adapter.

l If TAG of the Ethernet board is set to Tag Aware, see Configuring the External Port ofthe Ethernet Board to set the TAG of the Ethernet board to Access, and to set DefaultVLAN ID to the VLAN ID of the accessed service.

Procedure

Step 1 Use an Ethernet cable to connect the Ethernet port of the laptop to the Ethernet service port ofthe IDU, based on the test connection diagram.

Step 2 Set the IP addresses of the two laptops and ensure the IP addresses are on the same networksegment.

Set the IP address for laptop A.l IP address: 10.1.1.2

l Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0

l Default gateway: null

Set the IP address for laptop B.l IP address: 10.1.1.5

l Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0

l Default gateway: null

Step 3 Start the MS-DOS program of laptop A, and run the ping 10.1.1.5 -n 200 -l 2000 command.

NOTE

l 10.1.1.5: indicates the IP address of laptop B.

l -n Num: indicates that Num packets are sent to the opposite computer.

l -l Num: indicates that the buffer area for transmission is Num bytes in size.

Step 4 After you run the command, check the result.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-35

Page 136: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

The result shows that there are no lost packets. That is, the output display should contain thefollowing information:Lost = 0 (0% loss)

----End

5.4 Testing AM SwitchingBy testing AM switching, you can check whether AM switching is normal on radio links thatare enabled with the AM function.

5.4.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER TesterIf a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test the AM switching.

5.4.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER TesterIf no BER tester is available, you can test the AM switching by querying the bit errors over radiolinks.

5.4.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER TesterIf a BER tester is available, the BER tester can be used to test the AM switching.

Prerequisitel The antennas must be aligned.

l The radio links must be Hybrid radio links for which the AM function is enabled.

l The E1 service must be configured.

l The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram

NE BNE A

The following test procedure considers the E1 service between NEs as an example.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 137: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Procedure

Step 1 Connect a BER tester to the first E1 port on the local NE.

Step 2 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 3 On the remote NE, perform an inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 4 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Specified Modulation

Mode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

3. Click Apply.

Step 5 Querying the AM working status.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Query.Transmit-End Modulation Mode should be Manually Specified Modulation Mode of a pre-set value.

Step 6 Use the BER tester to test the bit errors.The test result should show that no bit error occurs.

Step 7 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the

Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the plannedvalues.

3. Click Apply.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-37

Page 138: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 8 Querying the AM working status.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Query.Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity ofa preset value.

NOTE

In the case of unfavorable weather, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value ofModulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

Step 9 Check the BER test result.There should be no bit errors.

Step 10 Release the inloop set in Step 3.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

----End

5.4.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER TesterIf no BER tester is available, you can test the AM switching by querying the bit errors over radiolinks.

Prerequisitel The antennas must be aligned.

l The radio links must be Hybrid radio links for which the AM function is enabled.

l The weather is favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 139: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Test Connection Diagram

NE BNE A

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute on the local NE.

1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AMConfiguration from the Function Tree.

2. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Disable, and set Manually Specified ModulationMode to the same value as Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.

3. Click Apply.

Step 2 Query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board on the local NE.

1. Select the required IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.

2. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.

3. In Monitored Object Filter Condition, select All.

4. Set Monitor Period to 15-Minute.

5. In Count, select Other Errors. In Display Options, select Consecutive Severely ErroredSeconds Second.

6. Click Query.In performance events, the value of FEC_BEF_COR_ER should be 0.

Step 3 Query the AM working status on the local NE.

1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AMConfiguration from the Function Tree.

2. Click Query.

Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Manually Specified Modulation Mode of a pre-set value.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-39

Page 140: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 4 Reset the performance event register.1. Select the required IF board from the Object Tree in NE Explorer.2. In the Function Tree, choose Performance > Current Performance.3. Click Reset.

The confirmation dialog box is displayed.4. Click OK.

Step 5 Configure the Hybrid/AM attribute to the planned values on the local NE.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. On the local NE, set the AM attribute to Enable, and set Modulation Mode of the

Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity to the plannedvalues.

3. Click Apply.

Step 6 Repeat Step 2. Wait for a period, and query the 15-minute performance value of the IF board onthe local NE.In performance events, the value of FEC_BEF_COR_ER should be 0.

Step 7 Query the AM working status on the local NE.1. Select the IF board from the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration > Hybrid/AM

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click Query.Transmit-End Modulation mode should be Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity ofa preset value.

NOTE

In the case of unfavorable weather, the current modulation mode may be lower than the value ofModulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity.

----End

5.5 Testing Protection SwitchingBy testing protection switching, you can check whether the protection switching is normal onradio links.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 141: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

5.5.1 Testing IF 1+1 SwitchingBy checking the change in the slot that the current working board in an IF 1+1 protection groupresides after the switching, you can check whether IF 1+1 protection works normally.

5.5.2 Testing N+1 Protection SwitchingBy checking the change in the slot that the current working board in an IF N+1 protection groupresides after the switching, you can check whether the IF N+1 protection works normally.

5.5.3 Testing SNCP SwitchingBy checking the change in the working port of an SNCP protection group after the switching,you can check whether the SNCP works correctly.

5.5.4 Testing ERPSBy checking the change in the port status of an ERPS protection group after the switching, youcan check whether the ERPS function works normally.

5.5.5 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP SwitchingBy checking the change in the current working port of an MSP group after the switching, youcan check whether the two-fiber bidirectional MSP works normally.

5.5.6 Testing Linear MSP SwitchingBy checking the change in the current working port of an MSP group after the switching, youcan check whether the linear MSP works normally.

5.5.1 Testing IF 1+1 SwitchingBy checking the change in the slot that the current working board in an IF 1+1 protection groupresides after the switching, you can check whether IF 1+1 protection works normally.

Prerequisitel The antennas must be aligned.

l The equipment must be configured with IF 1+1 protection.

l The E1 service must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-5 Configuration for testing the linear MSP switching

NE A and NE B are configured as follows:

l Main IF board: IFH2 in slot 5

l Standby IF board: IFH2 in slot 7

l Main ODU: ODU in slot 15

l Standby ODU: ODU in slot 17

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-41

Page 142: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NE BNE A

As shown in Figure 5-5, the following steps consider the E1 service between NE A and NE Bthat is configured with 1+1 HSB protection as an example.

NOTE

l If Working Mode of IF 1+1 protection is set to HSB or SD, TX Status should be set to mute for the ODUon the main channel of NE A, and Enable Reverse Switching should be set to Enable. The switching occursat NE A.

l If Working Mode of IF 1+1 protection is set to FD, TX Status should be set to mute for the ODU on themain channel of NE B. The switching occurs at NE A.

PrecautionsNOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Board of Device or Active Boardof Channel in Protection Group when the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching iscomplete.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 11.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 6 to Step 10.

Step 2 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 3 On NE A at the central site, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 4 On NE B at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 143: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.

Step 5 Test the BER by using the BER tester.There should be no bit errors.

Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and then choose Configuration >

Link Configuration.2. Select IF 1+1 Protection, and then click Query.3. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the main IF board

5-IFH2.

Step 7 Set TX Status to mute for the main ODU 15-ODU of NE A.1. Select the NE in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose Configuration > Link

Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.4. Click Apply.

Step 8 Check the availability of the service after the switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the service is restored after atransient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 service is transmitted on the radio link.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services ThroughPRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.

No BER tester is available on site, and theEthernet service is transmitted on the radiolink.

See 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test theavailability of the Ethernet service.

Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Select IF 1+1 Protection, and then click Query.3. In Protection Group, the value of Active Board of Device should be the standby IF board

7-IFH2.

Step 10 Set TX Status to mute for the main ODU 15-ODU of NE A.

Step 11 Release the loopback set in Step 4.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-43

Page 144: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

----End

5.5.2 Testing N+1 Protection SwitchingBy checking the change in the slot that the current working board in an IF N+1 protection groupresides after the switching, you can check whether the IF N+1 protection works normally.

Prerequisitel The antennas must be aligned.

l The equipment must be configured with N+1 protection.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-6 Configuration for testing the N+1 protection switching

NE A and NE B are configured as follows:l Main IF boards: IFH2 in slot 5 and IFH2 in slot 7

l Standby IF board: IFH2 in slot 8

l Main ODU: ODU in slot 15 and ODU in slot 17

l Standby ODU: ODU in slot 18

NE BNE A

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 145: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

As shown in Figure 5-6, the following procedures consider the E1 service between NE A andNE B that is configured with N+1 (N=2) protection as an example.

PrecautionsNOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Switching Status in Slot MappingRelation when the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 11.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 6 to Step 10.

Step 2 On NE A at the central site, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 4 On NE B at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 5 Test the BER by using the BER tester.There should be no bit errors.

Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B.1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Select N+1 protection, and then click Query.3. In Slot Mapping Relation, Switching Status of the working units 5-IFH2-1 and 7-IFH2-1

and the protection unit 8-IFH2-1 should be Normal.

NOTE

If a fault occurs, you must rectify the fault and then proceed with the test.

Step 7 Set TX Status to mute for the main ODU 15-ODU of NE A.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-45

Page 146: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then chooseConfiguration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.

3. Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.

4. Click Apply.

Step 8 Check the availability of the service after the switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the service is restored after atransient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 service is transmitted on the radio link.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services ThroughPRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.

No BER tester is available on site, and theEthernet service is transmitted on the radiolink.

See 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test theavailability of the Ethernet service.

Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE B.

1. Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE B, and then chooseConfiguration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.

2. Select N+1 protection, and then click Query.

3. In Slot Mapping Relation, the Switching Status of the working unit 5-IFH2-1 should beSF Switching.

Step 10 Set TX Status to Unmute for the main ODU 15-ODU of NE A.

Step 11 Release the loopback set in Step 4.

1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.

----End

5.5.3 Testing SNCP SwitchingBy checking the change in the working port of an SNCP protection group after the switching,you can check whether the SNCP works correctly.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 147: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Prerequisitel The antennas must be aligned.

l The equipment must be configured with SNCP protection.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram

As shown in Figure 5-7, the following procedures consider the E1 service between NE A andNE C that is configured with the SNCP as an example. Figure 5-7 shows a network composedof radio links, and the test procedures are similar in the case of a network composed of opticalfiber links.

Figure 5-7 Networking diagram

NE A and NE C are configured as follows:

l West IF board: IFH2 in slot 5

l East IF board: IFH2 in slot 7

l West ODU: ODU in slot 15

l East ODU: ODU in slot 17

NE A

Working SNCProtecting SNC

NE B

NE C

NE D

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-47

Page 148: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

PrecautionsNOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of Active Channel in Working Service whenthe protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 11.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 6 to Step 10.

Step 2 On NE A at the central site, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 4 On NE C at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 5 Test the BER by using the BER tester.There are no bit errors.

Step 6 Before switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C.1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Configuration

> SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.2. In Working Cross-Connection, select an SNCP service that is already created, then click

Function, and finally select Query Switching Status.3. The current SNCP status of the equipment is indicated in Working Cross-Connection and

Protection Cross-Connection.In Current Status, Normal should be displayed. In Active Channel, WorkingChannel should be displayed.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 149: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 7 Set TX Status to mute for the main ODU 15-ODU of NE A.1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Configuration

> Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.4. Click Apply.

Step 8 Check the availability of the service after switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the service is restored after atransient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 service is transmitted on the radio link.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services ThroughPRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.

Step 9 After switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE C.1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree, and then choose Configuration

> SNCP Service Control from the Function Tree.2. Click Function, and then select Query Switching Status.

In Current Status, SF Switching should be displayed. In Active Channel, ProtectionChannel should be displayed.

Step 10 Set TX Status to unmute for the main ODU 15-ODU of NE A.

Step 11 Release the loopback that is set in Step 4.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

----End

5.5.4 Testing ERPSBy checking the change in the port status of an ERPS protection group after the switching, youcan check whether the ERPS function works normally.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-49

Page 150: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Prerequisitel The equipment must be configured with ERPS.

l The network cables for carrying the working and protection Ethernet services in the ERPSgroup must be properly connected.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Test Connection DiagramAs shown in Figure 5-8, the following procedures consider the Ethernet service between NE Aand NE D that is configured with ERPS as an example, in which NE A functions as the ownernode.

Figure 5-8 Networking diagram for testing ERPS

NE A, NE B, NE C, and NE D are configured as follows:l West IF board: IFH2 in slot 5

l East IF board: IFH2 in slot 7

l West ODU: ODU in slot 15

l East ODU: ODU in slot 17

Working channel

NE BProtection channelWest

East

West

West

East

East

East

West

NE A

NE C

NE D

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 151: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Procedure

Step 1 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.2. Select the required ERPS protection group, and then click Query.3. Status of State Machine needs to be Idle.

Step 2 See 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of Ethernet services.The test result should meet the service requirements.

Step 3 Set TX Status to mute for the west ODU 15-ODU of NE A.1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and then choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to mute.4. Click Apply.

Step 4 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Ethernet Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.2. Select the required ERPS protection group, and then click Query.3. Status of State Machine needs to be Idle.

Step 5 See 5.3 Testing Ethernet Services to test availability of Ethernet services.The test result should meet the service requirements.

Step 6 Set TX Status to unmute for the west ODU 15-ODU of NE D.1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE D, and then choose

Configuration > Link Configuration from the Function Tree.2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.3. Select the required ODU, and set TX Status to unmute.4. Click Apply.

----End

5.5.5 Testing Two-Fiber Bidirectional MSP SwitchingBy checking the change in the current working port of an MSP group after the switching, youcan check whether the two-fiber bidirectional MSP works normally.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-51

Page 152: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Prerequisitel The equipment must be configured with two-fiber bidirectional MSP.

l The fibers must be properly connected.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl BER tester

l Web LCT

Precautions

Figure 5-9 shows the linear MSP composed of the OptiX RTN 620 that is connected by opticalfibers. The following procedures consider the E1 service from NE A to NE B as an example.

Figure 5-9 Two-fiber bidirectional MSP switching

STM-4 two-fiberbidirectional MSP ring

NE A

NE B

NE C

NE D

East

West

West

West

East

East

West

East

Service between NE A and NE C

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 153: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 4 to Step 13.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 7 to Step 12.

Step 2 On NE A at the central site, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 4 On NE C at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 5 Test the BER by using the BER tester.There should be no bit errors. If any bit error occurs, see the Maintenance Guide for handlingthe fault.

Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree.2. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.

In Slot Mapping Relation, the Switching Status of east line and west line should beIdle.

NOTE

If a fault occurs, you must rectify the fault and then proceed with the test.

Step 7 Shut down the laser on the east optical interface board on NE A to trigger the two-fiberbidirectional MSP protection switching.1. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE

A.2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.3. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.4. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to

Close.5. Click Apply.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-53

Page 154: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

TIP

You can also trigger the two-fiber bidirectional MSP switching by disconnecting the optical fibers.

Step 8 Check the availability of the service after the switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the service is restored after atransient interruption.

The BER tester is unavailable on site, andthe E1 service is transmitted on the opticalfiber link.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services ThroughPRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.

Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree.2. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.

In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of Switching Status should be Signal Fail-Ring.

Step 10 Restart the laser on the east optical interface board on NE A.1. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE

A.2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.3. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.4. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to

Open.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 11 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Ring MS from the Function Tree.2. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.

In Slot Mapping Relation, the Switching Status of east line and west line should beIdle.

NOTE

After the service is restored, you can query Switching Status after the WTR time expires. The defaultvalue of WTR Time is 600s.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 155: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 12 Check the availability of the service after the switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the service is restored after atransient interruption. The default value ofWTR Time is 600s.

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 service is transmitted on the optical fiberlink.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services ThroughPRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.

NOTE

The Revertive Mode of the two-fiber bidirectional MSP protection should always be Revertive.

Step 13 Release the loopback set in Step 4.

1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.

----End

5.5.6 Testing Linear MSP SwitchingBy checking the change in the current working port of an MSP group after the switching, youcan check whether the linear MSP works normally.

Prerequisitel The equipment must be configured with the linear MSP.

l The working and protection optical fibers of the linear MSP are connected properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l BER tester

Test Connection Diagram

Figure 5-10 shows the linear MSP composed of the OptiX RTN 620 that is connected by opticalfibers. The following procedures consider the E1 service from NE A to NE B as an example.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-55

Page 156: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 5-10 Configuration for testing the linear MSP switching

NE A NE B

Protection channel

Working channel

PrecautionsNOTE

If no BER tester is available on site, you can compare the values of West Switching Status in Slot MappingRelation when the protection switching occurs and after the protection switching is complete.

ProcedureStep 1 Check whether a BER tester is available at the central site.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Perform Step 2 to Step 11.

No BER tester is available on site Perform Step 6 to Step 10.

Step 2 On NE A at the central site, connect one E1 port to the BER tester.

Step 3 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 4 On NE B at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 5 Test the BER by using the BER tester. There should be no bit errors.If any bit error occurs, see the Maintenance Guide for handling the fault.

Step 6 Before the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.3. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.

In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Idle.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 157: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

In the case of the working and protection units of the service that is configured with the linear MSP,the values of West Switching Status should be Idle. If a fault arises, you must rectify the fault andproceed with the linear MSP switching testing.

Step 7 Shut down the laser on the working unit on NE A.1. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE

A.2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.3. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.4. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch to

Close.5. Click Apply.

The Confirm dialog box is displayed.6. Click OK.

Step 8 Check the availability of the service after the switching.

If... Then...

A BER tester is available on site Check the test result on the BER tester. Itshould show that the service is restored after atransient interruption.

No BER tester is available on site, and theE1 service is transmitted on the optical fiberlink.

See 5.2.2 Testing E1 Services ThroughPRBS to test the availability of the E1 service.

Step 9 After the switching, query the status of the protection group that is configured on NE A.1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NE A, and then choose

Configuration > Linear MS from the Function Tree.2. In Slot Mapping Relation, select Working Unit.3. Click Query, and then select Query Switching Status.

In Slot Mapping Relation, the value of West Switching Status should be Switch uponsignal failure, the value of Protected Unit should be West Line of Working Unit.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-57

Page 158: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

In the case of the 1+1 linear MSP, Revertive Mode can be set to Revertive or Non-Revertive. In the caseof the 1:N linear MSP, Revertive Mode is always set to Revertive.

l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the service is restored. If Revertive Mode isset to Revertive for the linear MSP, the change in values of West Switching Status and ProtectedUnit can be queried after the WTR time expires.

l After the automatic switching occurs on the equipment, the service is restored. If Revertive Mode isset to Non-Revertive for the linear MSP, stop and then start the MSP protocol to restore the value ofWest Switching Status to Idle.

Step 10 Turn on the laser for the working unit on NE A.

1. Select the required optical interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer of NEA.

2. Choose Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.

3. Select By Function and then select Laser Switch from the drop-down list.

4. Select the laser port that corresponds to the working unit, and then set Laser Switch toOpen.

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.

Step 11 Release the loopback set in Step 4.

1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.

----End

5.6 Checking the Clock StatusBy checking the clock status for each NE, you can ensure that the clocks of all the NEs on aradio network are synchronized.

Prerequisite

The clock configuration must be complete. The link that transmit clocks must be normal.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials

Web LCT

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 159: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Procedure

Step 1 Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer, and then chooseConfiguration > Clock > Clock Synchronization Status from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click Query.

NOTE

l If the clock of an NE is selected as the master clock of the radio network, this clock is in free-run modeand the clocks of the other NEs are in tracing mode.

l If a service clock or an external clock is selected as the master clock of the radio network, the clocksof all the NEs are in tracing mode.

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 through Step 2 to check the working modes of the other NEs on the radio network.

----End

5.7 Testing the 24-Hour BERYou can check whether the equipment can transmit services stably for a long term by testing the24-hour BER.

PrerequisiteThe antennas must be aligned.

E1 service must be configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materialsl Web LCT

l BER tester

l E1 jumper

Precautionsl If the 24-hour BER cannot be tested for each hop of link because of restrictions of the actual

situation, choose the E1 service of the first node and the last node on each link to performthe test. Through this method, you can ensure that the test path covers all the radio links.

l The following test procedure considers the E1 service between NEs as an example.

Procedure

Step 1 On the equipment at the central site, extract several typical E1 services and then connect themto the DDF in a serial manner. After that, access these services to the BER tester.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 5 System Commissioning Guide

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-59

Page 160: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

RX TXDDF

1234....

RX TX

BER tester

Step 2 Use the Web LCT to set the automatic loopback release function of SDH Optical/ElectricalInterface IF/RF Port Loopback of all the NEs to Disabled. For details, see setting theautomatic release function of NEs.

Step 3 On the equipment at the remote site, perform a software inloop at the E1 port by using the NMS.

1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4. In Tributary Loopback, select Inloop.

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.

Step 4 Perform the 24-hour BER test by using the BER tester.

Step 5 Record the test result, which should meet the design requirements.

Step 6 Release the loopback and serial connection.

1. Select the PDH interface board in the Object Tree.

2. In the Function Tree, choose Configuration > PDH Interface.

3. Select By Function and select Tributary Loopback from the drop-down menu.

4. In Tributary Loopback, select Non-Loopback.

5. Click Apply.The Confirm dialog box is displayed.

6. Click OK.

----End

Postrequisitel If the first 24-hour BER test does not meet the specified requirement, find out the cause

and rectify the fault. Perform another 24-hour BER test until the test is passed.

l If the BER exceeds the nominal value in the test for a serial connection, locate the fault byusing the dichotomizing search or other methods until each channel passes the 24-hourBER test.

5 System Commissioning GuideOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

5-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 161: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

6 Introduction to a Hand-Held Tool

About This Chapter

To improve commissioning efficiency, Huawei has developed a hand-held tool dedicated to thesite commissioning of radio equipment.

6.1 Functions and FeaturesA hand-held tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of sitecommissioning of radio equipment.

6.2 Operation InterfaceA hand-held tool provides a user-friendly interface.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 6 Introduction to a Hand-Held Tool

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

Page 162: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

6.1 Functions and FeaturesA hand-held tool provides various functions and features to meet the requirements of sitecommissioning of radio equipment.

A hand-held tool provides the following functions:l Supports switch-on by pressing and holding.

l Supports automatic login to the NE upon switch-on, and supports serial port login modefrom MML to NMS.

l Automatically adds logical boards for in-position physical boards.

l Automatically changes the LCT access enabling status to Enable.

l Displays all in-service physical board information on the standby interface.

l Supports settings of IF information through function key F1, settings of NE attributesthrough function key F2, and query of configurations through function key F3.

l Supports settings and query of IF information, including transmit frequency, transmitpower, T/R spacing, IF channel bandwidth, modulation mode, and 1+1 protection scheme.

l Supports settings and query of NE attributes, including NE name, NE ID, extended ID,extended ECC, IP address, and subnet mask.

l Supports regular query of the receive power of an ODU.

l Supports query of the basic information, frequency range, power range, and serial numberof an ODU.

l Supports query of all current alarms on the NE.

l Supports query of the NE version and terminal version.

l Supports automatic backup to the flash memory for data protection after the NE databasesare changed.

l Supports a real-time check on the physical connections between the hand-held tool and theNE when the user interface is in standby state. Supports automatic re-login in the case ofdisconnection.

6.2 Operation InterfaceA hand-held tool provides a user-friendly interface.

A hand-held tool is available in two types: type I and type IV. The two types are the same infunction, but are different in exterior and key arrangement. The following figure shows theexterior and key arrangement of the two types of hand-held tool.

6 Introduction to a Hand-Held ToolOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 163: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Figure 6-1 Exterior and key arrangement of type I hand-held tool

Power key

Charge indicator

Backspace

Digit keys

Up and downkeys

Function keys

Screen

Communicationport

Reset portBack

cover lock

Decimal points

Communicationindicator

Batteryarea

The keys include digit keys, function keys, power key, and confirmation key. The screen mainlydisplays configuration information about the NE and modification.

Figure 6-2 Exterior and key arrangement of type II hand-held tool

Power keyChargeindicator

Backspace

Digit keys

Up and downkeys

Functionkeys

Screen

Communic-ation port

Reset port

Front Back

F3F2F1

147

C

258

0

369

Type I and type II are almost the same. The main difference is with regard to the key arrangement.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 6 Introduction to a Hand-Held Tool

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

Page 164: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)
Page 165: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

7 Configuration Example of Service Data

About This Chapter

This topic uses an example of configuring service data of one hop of TDM radio equipment todescribe how to configure service data.

7.1 Networking DiagramThis topic describes the networking information about the NEs.

7.2 Board ConfigurationsBefore performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the boardconfigurations of each NE.

7.3 Service PlanningThe service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuringthe NE data.

7.4 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

Page 166: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

7.1 Networking DiagramThis topic describes the networking information about the NEs.

As shown in Figure 7-1, there is a TDM radio link between NE A and NE B that are constructedby the OptiX RTN 620 s.

Figure 7-1 Networking diagram

NE BNE A

Tx high Tx low

10114930M14510M

8E1,7M,16QAM1+1 HSB

H-polarzation

Tx high station Tx Freq.Tx low station Tx Freq.

Radio work modeRF configuarion

Polarization

Link ID

7.2 Board ConfigurationsBefore performing the networking planning, you need to be familiar with the boardconfigurations of each NE.

The board configurations of NE A are the same as the board configurations of NE B, as shownin Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Board configuration diagram

FAN

Slot 20

EXT Slot7

EXT Slot5

PXC Slot3

PXC Slot1

EXT Slot8

EXT Slot6

EXT Slot4

SCC Slot2

IF1A

PO1PXC

PXC SCC

FAN

IF1A

NOTE

The ODU that is connected to the IF board in slot n occupies logical slot 10+n. The logical slot of the ODUis not shown in the board layout diagram.

7 Configuration Example of Service DataOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 167: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

7.3 Service PlanningThe service planning information contains all the parameter information required for configuringthe NE data.

NE attributes

Parameter NE A NE B

Equipment type OptiX RTN 620 OptiX RTN 620

NE ID 101 102

extended ID 9 (default value) 9 (default value)

NE IP address 129.9.0.101 129.9.0.102

Radio Link Information

Table 7-1 Planning information about radio links

Parameter Link 1

Tx high site NE A

Tx low site NE B

Tx frequency at the Tx high site (MHz) 14930

Tx frequency at the Tx low site (MHz) 14510

T/R Spacing (MHz) 420

Microwave working mode 4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM

Link protection mode 1+1 HSB

Polarization directiona H (horizontal polarization)

Transmit power (dBm) 5 (NE A)5 (NE B)

Receive power (dBm) -42 (NE A)-42 (NE B)

ATPC enabling Disabled

NOTEa: The planning information that is not associated with the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization direction) is notprovided in this example.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

Page 168: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Information About IF Boards

Based on the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1 protection,you can obtain the information of IF boards as shown in Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Information about IF boards

Parameter Link 1

Main IF board 5-IF1A (NE A)5-IF1A (NE B)

Standby IF board 7-IF1A (NE A)7-IF1A (NE B)

RF configuration mode Configuration in 1+1 HSB Protection Mode

Revertive mode Revertive (default value)

Wait to Restore Time 600 seconds (default value)

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled

Timeslot Allocation Information

Figure 7-3 Timeslot allocation diagram

Timeslot

Station NE BNE A

Links-1: NE A-NE B

VC12: 1-8VC4-1

4-PO1:1-8

5-IF1A

Add/DropFoward

VC12: 1-8

4-PO1:1-8

5-IF1A

Figure 7-3 shows the service timeslots between NEs.

E1 services between NE A and NE B: Ports 1-8 on the PO1 board in slot 4 add/drop services.

7 Configuration Example of Service DataOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 169: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Clock and Orderwire Information

Table 7-3 Clock and orderwire information

Parameter NE A NE B

Clocksource

First clock source Internal clock source 5-IF1A-1

Second clocksource

- 7-IF1A-1

Third clock source - Internal clock source

Orderwire

Orderwire phonenumber

101 102

Call waiting time 5 seconds 5 seconds

Orderwire port 5-IF1A-17-IF1A-1

5-IF1A-17-IF1A-1

Occupiedoverhead type

E1 E1

7.4 Configuration ProcessThis topic describes the procedure of data configuration.

PrecautionsIf operations including changing the ID of an NE, modifying the parameters of NEcommunication, and configuring logical boards are already performed, start site commissioningfrom Step 6.

Procedure

Step 1 See Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.

The parameters are set as follows.

Parameter Value

Network Segment 129.9.255.255

NOTE

In this example, the following assumptions are made: the IP address of the gateway NE is never changed andthe specific IP address is unknown. Therefore, the network segment 129.9.255.255 is used as the search domainto search for NEs. If the IP address of the gateway NE is known, it is recommended that you set the IP addressof the gateway NE as the search domain.

In normal cases, NE A and NE B are created in NE List.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

Page 170: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 2 See Logging in to an NE and log in to the NEs.

Parameter Value

User Name lct

Password password

Step 3 See Changing the ID of an NE and change NE IDs.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

ID 101 102

Extended ID 9 (default value) 9 (default value)

Step 4 See Configuring Logical Boards and configure logical boards.

Configure logical boards based on their mapping relationships with the physical boards.

Step 5 See Synchronizing NE Time and synchronize the NE time.

Step 6 See Creating IF 1+1 Protection and create IF 1+1 protection.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Working Mode HSB HSB

Revertive Mode Revertive Mode Revertive Mode

WTR Time(s) 600 600

Enable Reverse Switching Disabled Disabled

Working Board 5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A-1

Protection Board 7-IF1A-1 7-IF1A-1

Step 7 See Configuring IF/ODU Information for a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODUinformation.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value (NE A) Value (NE B)

5-IF1A & 15-ODU 5-IF1A & 15-ODU

Work Mode 4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM 4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM

7 Configuration Example of Service DataOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 171: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value (NE A) Value (NE B)

5-IF1A & 15-ODU 5-IF1A & 15-ODU

Link ID 101 101

ATPC Enable Status Disabled Disabled

TX Frequency(MHz) 14930 14510

T/R Spacing(MHz) 420 420

TX Power(dBm) 5 5

TX Status unmute unmute

Receive Power (dBm) -42 -42

Step 8 See Creating Cross-Connections for Point-to-Point Services and create the cross-connections.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Level VC-12 VC-12

Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional

Source 5-IF1A-1 5-IF1A-1

Source VC4 VC4-1 VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8 1-8

Sink 4-PO1 4-PO1

Sink VC4 - -

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8 1-8

Step 9 See Configuring a Clock Source and configure clock sources.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Clock Source Internal Clock Source 5-IF1A-1

- 7-IF1A-1

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 7 Configuration Example of Service Data

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

Page 172: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

- Internal Clock Source

Step 10 See Configuring the Orderwire Phone and configure the orderwire phone.

The parameters of NE A and NE B are set as follows.

Parameter Value

NE A NE B

Call Waiting Time(s) 9 9

Phone 1 101 102

Orderwire Port 5-IF1A-17-IF1A-1

5-IF1A-17-IF1A-1

Occupied Overhead Byte E1 E1

----End

7 Configuration Example of Service DataOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 173: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

8 Task Collection

About This Chapter

This topic describes various tasks involved in configuring and maintaining the product.

8.1 Creating MDsA maintenance domain (MD) defines the scope and level of the Ethernet OAM. The MDs ofdifferent levels and scopes can provide differentiated OAM services to users.

8.2 Creating MAsA maintenance domain (MD) can be divided into several independent maintenance associations(MA). By creating MAs, operators can associate specific Ethernet services with the MAs foreasy Ethernet OAM operation.

8.3 Creating MPsThe functions of the IEEE 802.1ag OAM can be used only after MPs are created.

8.4 Setting the Automatic Release FunctionTo protect the NM and NE communication from improper operations, an NE supports theautomatic release of the ODU mute, loopback, and other operations that require you to exercisecaution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enablethe automatic release function and the automatic release time using the NMS.

8.5 Configuring External Ethernet PortsWhen an NE uses external ports of Ethernet boards to gain access to Ethernet services, theattributes of external ports need to be configured so that external ports can work with the datacommunication equipment on the client side to provide normal access to Ethernet services.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 8 Task Collection

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

Page 174: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

8.1 Creating MDsA maintenance domain (MD) defines the scope and level of the Ethernet OAM. The MDs ofdifferent levels and scopes can provide differentiated OAM services to users.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The board for creating the MDs has been installed.

l Ethernet services have been created.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the relevant board, and then choose Configuration > EthernetMaintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Free.

Step 2 In the right-hand pane, click OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration dialogbox.

NOTE

In this user interface, you can maintain or delete OAM MDs.

Step 3 Click New, and then select Create MD from the drop-down list.

Step 4 In the Create MD dialog box that is displayed, set the corresponding parameters.

8 Task CollectionOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 175: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

Example

Table 8-1 Parameters

Field Value Default Description

Maintenance DomainName

For example: MD1 - Displays or sets the MDname.

MaintenanceAssociation Name

For example: MA1 - Displays or sets themaintenance associationname.

Maintenance DomainLevel

Consumer High(7)Consumer Middle(6)Consumer Low(5)Provider High(4)Provider Low(3)Operator High(2)Operator Middle(1)Operator Low(0)

Operator Low(0) Displays or sets themaintenance domainlevel. The greater thevalue, the higher thepriority.

Maintenance Level Consumer High(7)Consumer Middle(6)Consumer Low(5)Provider High(4)Provider Low(3)Operator High(2)Operator Middle(1)Operator Low(0)

Operator Low(0) The priority of the MP isthe priority of the MD. Thegreater the value, thehigher the priority.

8.2 Creating MAsA maintenance domain (MD) can be divided into several independent maintenance associations(MA). By creating MAs, operators can associate specific Ethernet services with the MAs foreasy Ethernet OAM operation.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 8 Task Collection

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

Page 176: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The MD has been created.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the relevant board, and then choose Configuration > EthernetMaintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Free.

Step 2 In the right-hand pane, click OAM Configuration to display the OAM Configuration dialogbox.

NOTE

In this user interface, you can create or delete OAM MAs.

Step 3 Click New, and then select Create MA from the drop-down list.

Step 4 In the Create MA dialog box that is displayed, set the corresponding parameters.

Step 5 Click Apply.

----End

Example

Table 8-2 Parameters

Field Value Default Description

Maintenance DomainName

For example: MD1 - Displays the maintenancedomain name.

8 Task CollectionOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 177: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Field Value Default Description

MaintenanceAssociation Name

For example: MA1 - Sets the maintenanceassociation name. MA is adomain related to aservice. Through MAdivision, the connectivitycheck (CC) can beperformed on the networkthat transmits a serviceinstance.

8.3 Creating MPsThe functions of the IEEE 802.1ag OAM can be used only after MPs are created.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l The Ethernet service has been created and activated.

l The MD and MA have been created before you create the standard MP.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

PrecautionsIn an OAM test, all maintenance points that are involved in the operation of the same serviceflow must be in the same maintenance domain. In an existing maintenance domain involved inthe same service flow, creating a maintenance point of the same level or a higher level maydamage the existing maintenance domain. As a result, the OAM test fails.

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select an Ethernet board, and then choose Configuration > EthernetMaintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Click New to displayed the Create MP dialog box. Set the relevant parameters in the dialogbox.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 8 Task Collection

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

Page 178: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

NOTE

Note:

l VLAN ID: Leave this field blank for PORT services. For PORT+VLAN services, set this parameterfor the services to be monitored.

l Service Direction: Only MEPs have the directions. Set the direction in which the packets aretransmitted to the port as the Ingress direction, and set the direction in which the packets are transmittedfrom the port as the Egress direction. The direction of the MIPs can be only bidirectional.

Step 3 Optional: Click Advanced. In the dialog box that is displayed, click Advanced.

NOTE

If an MEP is created, you can choose whether to perform the following configuration.

l Activate the CC and configure the sending period of the CC test.

l Set the timeout time for the LB or LT test.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

Example

Table 8-3 Parameters

Field Value Default Description

MaintenanceDomain Name

For example: MD1 NULL Displays the MD of the MP.NOTE

An MD is not required for a non-standard MP.For the creation of a non-standard MP, selectNULL.

MaintenanceAssociation Name

For example: MA1 NULL Displays the MA of the created MP.NOTE

An MA is not required for a non-standard MP.For the creation of a non-standard MP, selectNULL.

8 Task CollectionOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 179: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Field Value Default Description

Node slot-board-port - Selects the port where you want to create anMP.

VLAN ID 1-4095 - Configures the ID of the VLAN to which theservice of the MP belongs. The informationis contained in the OAM data packet. TheMPs with the same VLAN ID in an MD cancommunicate with each other.

MP ID Standard MP:00-00-0000 to FF-FF-1FFFNon-standard MP:00-00-0000 to FF-FF-FF00

- Uniquely identifies an MP. The bytes fromhigher bits to lower bits are respectivelydescribed here. The first byte indicates thenetwork number. The second byte indicatesthe number of the node in the local network.The third and forth bytes indicate the ID ofthe MP on the network node. The MP IDmust be unique in the entire network.

Type MEPMIP

MEP Specifies the MP type defined in IEEE802.1ag. MEP stands for Maintenanceassociation End Point, and MIP stands forMaintenance association IntermediatePoint.

Direction IngressEgress

- l Specifies the direction of the MEP.

l Ingress indicates the direction in whichthe packets are transmitted to the port,and Egress indicates the direction inwhich the packets are transmitted fromthe port.

CC Status ActivateInactivate

Inactivate Specifies whether to activate theconnectivity check (CC) function at an MP.

LB Timeout(ms) 3000-60000, inincrements of 100

5000 Displays the timeout duration in the LB test.

LT Timeout(ms) 3000-60000, inincrements of 100

5000 Sets the timeout duration of the LT test.

CCM SendingPeriod(ms)

Standard MP:

1000

10000

6000

600000

Common MP:

1000-60000

Standard MP:1000Common MP:5000

Sets the time interval for sending the CCMpacket at the maintenance point where theCC test is performed.l If the time interval is very short,

excessive service bandwidths are used.l If the time interval is very long, the CC

test is less sensitive to the serviceinterruption. Thus, the default value isrecommended.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 8 Task Collection

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

Page 180: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

8.4 Setting the Automatic Release FunctionTo protect the NM and NE communication from improper operations, an NE supports theautomatic release of the ODU mute, loopback, and other operations that require you to exercisecaution. The automatic release time is five minutes by default. You can set whether to enablethe automatic release function and the automatic release time using the NMS.

Prerequisitel The communication between the Web LCT and the NE must be normal.

l The NE user must have the authority of Maintenance Level or higher.

Procedure

Step 1 Select an NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer.

Step 2 Choose Configuration > Automatic Disabling of NE Function from the Function Tree.

Step 3 Specify Auto Disabling and Auto Disabling Time (min).

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings for the automatic release function.

----End

8.5 Configuring External Ethernet PortsWhen an NE uses external ports of Ethernet boards to gain access to Ethernet services, theattributes of external ports need to be configured so that external ports can work with the datacommunication equipment on the client side to provide normal access to Ethernet services.

Prerequisitel The NE user must have the authority of Operation Level or higher.

l Ethernet switching boards must be added on the Slot Layout.

Tools, Equipment, and MaterialsWeb LCT

Precautionsl The Ethernet boards supported by the OptiX RTN 620 are the EFT4, EMS6, and EFP6.

– Ethernet ports FE1-FE4 of an EFT4 board correspond to PORT1-PORT4 respectively.The EFT4 board does not support the setting of TAG attributes, network attributes, andadvanced attributes.

– Ethernet ports FE1-FE4 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT1-PORT4 respectively.Ports GE1 and GE2 of an EMS6 board correspond to PORT5 and PORT6 respectively.

– Ethernet ports FE1-FE6 of an EFP6 board correspond to PORT1-PORT6 respectively.

l The following procedures describe how to configure the external port of an EMS6 board.

8 Task CollectionOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 181: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Procedure

Step 1 In the NE Explorer, select the required Ethernet board, and then choose Configuration >Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.

Step 2 Select External Port.

Step 3 Set the basic attributes of the port.

1. Click the Basic Attributes tab.

2. Set the basic attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 4 Set the flow control mode of the port.

1. Click the Flow Control tab.

2. Set the flow control mode of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 5 Optional: Set the TAG attributes of the port.

1. Click the TAG Attributes tab.

2. Set the TAG attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 6 Optional: Set the network attributes of the port.

1. Click the Network Attributes tab.

2. Set the network attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

Step 7 Optional: Specifies the network attribute of a port.

1. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.

2. Set the advanced attributes of the port.

3. Click Apply.

----End

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 8 Task Collection

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

Page 182: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Example

Table 8-4 Parameters for the basic attributes

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Enabled/Disabled EnabledDisabled

Disabled l If the port gains access to services, set thisparameter to Enabled. In the case ofother ports, set this parameter toDisabled.

l If you set this parameter to Enabled forthe port that does not gain access toservices, an ETH_LOS alarm may begenerated.

Working Mode l In the case of theEFT4 board:Auto-Negotiation10M Full-Duplex100M Full-Duplex

l In the case of theEMS6 board:Auto-Negotiation10M Half-Duplex10M Full-Duplex100M Half-Duplex100M Full-Duplex1000M Full-Duplex

l In the case of theEFP6 board:Auto-Negotiation10M Half-Duplex10M Full-Duplex100M Half-Duplex100M Full-Duplex

Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of different typessupport different working modes.

l When the equipment at the opposite endworks in the auto-negotiation mode, setthe working mode of the equipment at thelocal end to Auto-Negotiation.

l When the equipment at the opposite endworks in full-duplex mode, set theworking mode of the equipment at thelocal end to 10M Full-Duplex, 1000Full-Duplex or 1000M Full-Duplex,depending on the port rate of theequipment at the opposite end.

l When the equipment at the opposite endworks in half-duplex mode, set theworking mode of the equipment at thelocal end to 10M Full-Duplex, 100MFull-Duplex or set to Auto-Negotiation, depending on the port rateof the equipment at the opposite end.

l The GE optical interfaces on the EMS6support only auto-negotiation and1000M full duplex working modes.

8 Task CollectionOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

8-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 183: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Maximum FrameLength

In the case of theEFT4 board:1518-1535In the case of theEMS6 board:1518-9600In the case of theEFP6 board:1518-2000

1522 l The value of this parameter is greater thanthe maximum length of a frame among allthe data frames to be transmitted.

l If Jumbo frames are not considered andthe accessed services are ordinaryEthernet frames that use VLAN tags ordo not have VLAN tags, it isrecommended that you use the defaultvalue. If the access services includeservices (such as QinQ services) that usetwo-layer tags, it is recommended thatyou set this parameter to 1526 or a greatervalue.

MAC LoopBack Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l When you set this parameter to Inloop,the Ethernet frame signals to be sent tothe opposite end are looped back.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou use the default value.

PHY LoopBack Non-LoopbackInloop

Non-Loopback l When you set this parameter to Inloop,the Ethernet physical signals to be sent tothe opposite end are looped back.

l In normal cases, it is recommended thatyou use the default value.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 8 Task Collection

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

Page 184: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Table 8-5 Parameters for flow control

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Non-AutonegotiationFlow ControlMode

DisabledEnable SymmetricFlow ControlSend OnlyReceive Only

Disabled l This parameter is valid only when you setWorking Mode to Auto-Negotiation.

l When you set this parameter to EnableSymmetric Flow Control, the port cansend the PAUSE frames and process thereceived PAUSE frames.

l When you set this parameter SendOnly, the port can send the PAUSEframes in the case of congestion butcannot process the received PAUSEframes.

l When you set this parameter to SendOnly, the port can process the receivedPAUSE frames but cannot send thePAUSE frames in the case of congestion.

l The non-autonegotiation flow controlmode of the equipment at the local endmust be the same as the non-autonegotiation flow control mode of theequipment at the opposite end.

AutonegotiationFlow ControlMode

DisabledEnable SymmetricFlow ControlEnable Symmetric/Dissymmetric FlowControlEnable SymmetricFlow Control

Disabled l This parameter is valid only when you setWorking Mode to Auto-Negotiation.

l When you set this parameter to EnableSymmetric Flow Control, the port cansend the PAUSE frames and process thereceived PAUSE frames.

l When you set this parameter to EnableSymmetric Flow Control, the port cansend the PAUSE frames in the case ofcongestion but cannot process thereceived PAUSE frames.

l When you set this parameter to EnableSymmetric/Dissymmetric FlowControl, the port can perform as follows:– Sends and processes the PAUSE

frames.– Sends but does not process the PAUSE

frames.– Processes but does not send PAUSE

frames.l The auto-negotiation flow control mode

of the equipment at the local end must bethe same as the auto-negotiation flowcontrol mode of the equipment at theopposite end.

8 Task CollectionOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

8-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 185: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Table 8-6 Parameters for the TAG attributes

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

TAG Tag AwareAccessHybrid

Tag Aware l When ports are configured with TAGflags, the ports process frames by usingthe methods provided in Table 8-9.

l If all the accessed services are frameswith the VLAN tag (tagged frames), setthis parameter to Tag Aware.

l If all the accessed services are frameswithout the VLAN tag (untaggedframes), set this parameter to Access.

l If the accessed services contain taggedframes and untagged frames, set thisparameter to Hybrid.

Default VLAN ID 1 to 4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when you setTAG to Access or Hybrid.

l For details about the functions of thisparameter, see Table 8-9.

l You need to set this parameter accordingto the actual situation.

VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l This parameter is valid only when you setTAG to Access or Hybrid.

l For details about the functions of thisparameter, see Table 8-9.

l When the VLAN priority is required todivide streams or to be used for otherpurposes, set this parameter according tothe actual situation. Generally, it isrecommended that you use the defaultvalue.

Entry Detection EnabledDisabled

Enable l Indicates whether to check the incomingpackets from the port according to theTAG attributes.

l You need to set this parameter accordingto the actual situation.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 8 Task Collection

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-13

Page 186: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Table 8-7 Parameters for the network attributes

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Port Attributes UNIC-AwareS-Aware

UNI l When you set this parameter to UNI, theport processes data frames according tothe tag attributes.

l When you set this parameter to C-Awareor S-Aware, the port does notprocess the data frames according to thetag attributes but processes the dataframes according to the method ofprocessing QinQ services.

l If a port needs to transmit a QinQ-basedservice, set this parameter to C-Aware orS-Aware. Otherwise, this parametertakes the default value.

Table 8-8 Parameters for the advanced attributes

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

EnablingBroadcast PacketSuppression

DisabledEnabled

Disabled Specifies whether to restrict the traffic ofbroadcast packets according to the ratio ofthe broadcast packets to the total packets.When a broadcast storm may occur in theequipment at the opposite end, set thisparameter to Enabled.

Broadcast PacketSuppressionThreshold

10% to 100% 30% The port discards the received broadcastpackets when the ratio of the receivedbroadcast packets to the total packetsexceeds the value of this parameter. Thevalue of this parameter is greater than theratio of the broadcast packets to the totalpackets when the broadcast storm does notoccur. Generally, set this parameter to 30%or a greater value.

Flow Threshold(Mbps)

In the case ofPORT1-PORT4: 0to 100In the case ofPORT5-PORT6: 0to 1000

In the case ofPORT1-PORT4:100In the case ofPORT5-PORT6:1000

l Specifies the threshold when the flow iszero. This parameter is valid only whenyou set Zero-Flow Monitor toEnabled.

l This parameter is not applicable to theEFP6 board.

8 Task CollectionOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

8-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 187: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Parameter Value Range Default Value Description

Zero-FlowMonitor

DisabledEnabled

Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the zero-flowmonitoring function.

l When this parameter is set to Enabled fora port, the traffic threshold-crossingalarm is reported if the traffic over theport is lower than the traffic threshold.

l This parameter is not applicable to theEFP6 board.

Zero-FlowMonitor Interval(min)

0 to 30 0 l Specifies the zero-flow monitoring cycle.This parameter is valid only when you setZero-Flow Monitor to Enabled.

l This parameter is not applicable to theEFP6 board.

Loop Detection DisabledEnabled

Disabled Specifies whether to enable loop detection,which is used to check whether a loop existson the port.

Table 8-9 Methods used by ports to process data frames

Direction Type of DataFrame

Processing Method

Tag aware Access Hybrid

Ingress Tagged frame The port receives theframe.

The port discards theframe.

The port receives theframe.

Untagged frame The port discards theframe.

The port adds theVLAN tag to whichDefault VLAN IDand VLANPrioritycorrespond, to theframe, and receivesthe frame.

The port adds theVLAN tag to whichDefault VLAN IDand VLANPrioritycorrespond, to theframe, and receivesthe frame.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide 8 Task Collection

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-15

Page 188: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Direction Type of DataFrame

Processing Method

Tag aware Access Hybrid

Egress Tagged frame The port transmitsthe frame.

The port strips theVLAN tag from theframe and thentransmits the frame.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame isDefault VLANID, the port stripsthe VLAN tagfrom the frameand thentransmits theframe.

l If the VLAN IDin the frame is notDefault VLANID, the portdirectly transmitsthe frame.

8 Task CollectionOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

8-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 189: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

A Glossary

Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

A.1 0-9

A.2 A-E

A.3 F-J

A.4 K-O

A.5 P-T

A.6 U-Z

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

Page 190: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

A.1 0-91+1 protection An architecture that has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection

SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. At the source end, the normal traffic signal ispermanently bridged to both the working and protection SNC/trail. At the sink end, thenormal traffic signal is selected from the better of the two SNCs/trails. Due to thepermanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected trafficsignal to be provided.

1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)

802.1Q in 802.1Q 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) is a VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLANtag to a tagged frame.The implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to aframe with a private VLAN tag, making the frame encapsulated with two layers of VLANtags. The frame is forwarded over the service provider's backbone network based on thepublic VLAN tag. By this, a layer 2 VPN tunnel is provided to customers.The QinQfeature enables the transmission of the private VLANs to the peer end transparently.

A.2 A-E

A

ABR See Available Bit Rate

ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization

Access Control List Access Control List (ACL) is a list of IP address. The addresses listed in the ACL areused for authentication. If the ACL for the user is not null, it indicates that the addresswhere the user logged in is contained in the list.

ACL See Access Control List

adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to thechannel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrumutilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adoptsthe low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of thelink that carries high-priority services.

ADC See Analog to Digital Converter

add/drop multiplexer Add/Drop Multiplexing. Network elements that provide access to all or some subset ofthe constituent signals contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals areadded to (inserted), and/or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passedthrough the ADM.

Address ResolutionProtocol

Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses toMAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses throughARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the hostconverts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipmentthrough its IP address.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 191: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

adjacent channelalternate polarization

A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontalpolarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.

ADM See add/drop multiplexer

Administrative Unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layerand the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher orderVC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative tothe multiplex section frame start.

AF See Assured Forwarding

AGC See Automatic Gain Control

aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete orconceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.

AIS See Alarm Indication Signal

Alarm automaticreport

When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the N2000. Then,an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the details of the alarm.

alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.

Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based onthe filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarminformation. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed orstored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.

Alarm IndicationSignal

A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failurehas been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers. Note: SeeITU-T Rec. G.707/Y.1322 for specific AIS signals.

Alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be thenetworkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific functionmodule of a specific board.

AM See adaptive modulation

Analog to DigitalConverter

An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. Thereverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).

APS See Automatic Protection Switching

ARP See Address Resolution Protocol

ASK amplitude shift keying

Assured Forwarding Assured Forwarding (AF) is one of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by theDiff-Serv workgroup of IETF. AF is suitable for certain key data services that requireassured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the limit, AF assures quality inforwarding. For traffic that exceeds the limit, AF degrades the service class and continuesto forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.

AsynchronousTransfer Mode

A data transfer technology based on cell, in which packets allocation relies on channeldemand. It supports fast packet switching to achieve efficient utilization of networkresources. The size of a cell is 53 bytes, which consist of 48-byte payload and 5-byteheader.

ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM PVC ATM Permanent Virtual Circuit

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

Page 192: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

ATPC See automatic transmit power control

attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fibre Link. Generally used toensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.

AU See Administrative Unit

Automatic GainControl

A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as afunction of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.

Automatic ProtectionSwitching

Automatic Protection Switching (APS) is the capability of a transmission system todetect a failure on a working facility and to switch to a standby facility to recover thetraffic.

automatic transmitpower control

A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detectedat the receiver

Available Bit Rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possibleforwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-timequality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.

B

Backward DefectIndication

When detecting a defect, the sink node of a LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in anetwork. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies thetransmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.

Base Station Controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworkswith the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It providesthe following functions: Radio resource management, Base station management, Powercontrol, Handover control, and Traffic measurement. One BSC controls and managesone or more BTSs in an actual network.

Base TransceiverStation

A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of trafficand signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radioequipment, and the antenna.

BDI See Backward Defect Indication

BE See best effort

BER See Bit Error Rate

best effort A kind of PHB (Per-Hop-Behavior). In the forwarding process of a DS domain, the trafficof this PHB type features reachability but the DS node does not guarantee the forwardingquality.

BIOS Basic Input Output System

BIP Bit-Interleaved Parity

bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the correspondingbit in the received digital signal.

Bit Error Rate Bit error rate. Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index usedto measure the communications quality of a network.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 193: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

blank filler panel A piece of board to cover vacant slots, to keep the frame away from dirt, to keep properairflow inside the frame, and to beautify the frame appearance.

BPDU See Bridge Protocol Data Unit

Bridge Protocol DataUnit

The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN thatuses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information onports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it wasintended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in anetwork topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridgesinterfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.

Broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range isdetermined by the broadcast address.

BSC See Base Station Controller

BTS See Base Transceiver Station

Buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking tocompensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of datacan be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices.

C

C-VLAN Customer VLAN

Cable distribution plate A component which is used to arrange the cables in order.

cable ladder (1) A cable ladder is a frame which supports electrical cables. (2) Two metal cablesusually made of stainless steel with rungs of lightweight metal tubing such as aluminum,six or eight inches wide spaced about eighteen inches apart. It can be rolled into a compactlightweight bundle for transport ease.

cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.

cabling trough The trough which is used for cable routing in the cabinet.

captive nut Captive nuts (or as they are more correctly named, 'tee nuts') have a range of uses butare more commonly used in the hobby for engine fixing (securing engine mounts to thefirewall), wing fixings, and undercarriage fixing.

CAR See committed access rate

CBR See Constant Bit Rate

CCC See Circuit Cross Connect

CCDP See Co-Channel Dual Polarization

CCM See continuity check message

CE See Customer Edge

Central ProcessingUnit

The CPU is the brains of the computer. Sometimes referred to simply as the processoror central processor, the CPU is where most calculations take place.

CES See Circuit Emulation Service

CF See compact flash

CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

Page 194: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

CIR See Committed Information Rate

Circuit Cross Connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.

Circuit EmulationService

A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At thetransmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATMcells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, theinterface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CEStechnology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the originalsequence at the reception end.

CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree

CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.

Class of Service A class object that stores the priority mapping rules. When network congestion occurs,the class of service (CoS) first processes services by different priority levels from highto low. If the bandwidth is insufficient to support all services, the CoS dumps the servicesof low priority.

Clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in anetwork.

Co-Channel DualPolarization

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a verticalpolarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twicethe transmission capacity of the single polarization.

Coarse WavelengthDivision Multiplexing

A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels intothe same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDMdoes not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.

Colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.

Combined cabinet Two or multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are combined to serve as one BTS.

committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classifiedinto QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission ratecan be defined.

CommittedInformation Rate

The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normalconditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred tothe leaky bucket.

Common and InternalSpanning Tree

Common and Internal Spanning Tree. The single Spanning Tree calculated by STP andRSTP together with the logical continuation of that connectivity through MST Bridgesand regions, calculatedby MSTP to ensure that all LANs in the Bridged Local AreaNetwork are simply and fully connected.

compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used inportable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory ina standardized enclosure.

Concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can beused a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

connecting plate forcombining cabinets

A plate that connects two adjacent cabinet together at the cabinet top for fixing.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 195: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Connectivity Check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved byeach MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically. This detectionis called CC detection.

Constant Bit Rate constant bit rate. A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transferscells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that dependon precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.

Constraint ShortestPath First

An extension of shortest path algorithms like OSPF and IS-IS. The path computed usingCSPF is a shortest path fulfilling set of constrains. It simply means that it runs shortestpath algorithm after pruning those links that violate a given set of constraints. Aconstraint could be minimum bandwidth required per link (also know as bandwidthguaranteed constraint), end-to-end delay, maximum number of link traversed etc. CSPFis widely used in MPLS Traffic Engineering. The routing using CSPF is known asConstraint Based Routing (CBR).

Constraint-basedRouted-LabelDistribution Protocol

An alternative to RSVP (Resource ReSerVation Protocol) in MPLS (MultiProtocolLabel Switching) networks. RSVP, which works at the IP (Internet Protocol) level, usesIP or UDP datagrams to communicate between LSR (Label Switched Routing) peers.RSVP does not require the maintenance of TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)sessions, although RSVP must assume responsibility for error control. CR-LDP isdesigned to facilitate the routing of LSPs (Label Switched Paths) through TCP sessionsbetween LSR peers through the communication of label distribution messages duringthe session.

continuity checkmessage

CCM is used to detect the link status.

corrugated tube A pipe which is used for fiber routing.

CoS See Class of Service

CPU See Central Processing Unit

CR-LDP See Constraint-based Routed-Label Distribution Protocol

CRC See Cyclic Redundancy Check

cross polarizationinterferencecancellation

A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminatethe cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.

CSPF See Constraint Shortest Path First

Customer Edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to theService Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.

CWDM See Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Cyclic RedundancyCheck

A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking usesa complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sendingdevice performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that itsends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation aftertransmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmissionwas error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmissionincludes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-7

Page 196: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

D

Data Circuit-terminalEquipment

Also Data Communications Equipment (DCE) and Data Carrier Equipment (DCE). Thebasic function of a DCE is to convert data from one interface, such as a digital signal, toanother interface, such as an analog signal. One example of DCE is a modem.

Data CommunicationNetwork

A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the DataCommunication Function (DCF).

Data CommunicationsChannel

The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal totransmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.

Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,UDP datagram.

DC See Direct Current

DC-C See DC-Return Common (with Ground)

DC-I See DC-Return Isolate (with Ground)

DC-Return Common(with Ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line betweenthe output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DC-Return Isolate(with Ground)

A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited withthe PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGNDon the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.

DCC See Data Communications Channel

DCE See Data Circuit-terminal Equipment

DCN See Data Communication Network

DDF See Digital Distribution Frame

DDN See Digital Data Network

DE See discard eligible

Detour LSP The LSP that is used to re-route traffic around a failure in one-to-one backup.

diamond-shaped nut A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.

Differentiated Services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a seriesof functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioningfunctions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.

Differentiated ServicesCode Point

Differentiated Services CodePoint. A marker in the header of each IP packet using bits0-6 in the DS field. Routers provide differentiated classes of services to various servicestreams/flows based on this marker. In other words, routers select corresponding PHBaccording to the DSCP value.

DiffServ See Differentiated Services

Digital Data Network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiberchannel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplextechnology.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 197: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Digital DistributionFrame

A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange withtransmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.

digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of thecarrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, theinformation can be transmitted by the carrier.

Direct Current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop orchange amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.

discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supportsthe FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet trafficexceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In thecase of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.

Distance VectorMulticast RoutingProtocol

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. The DVMRP protocol is an Internetgateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical densemode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routingdatagrams with its neighbors.

DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in adomain that is not DS-capable.

DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group ofnetwork nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It providespoint-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.

DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.

DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.

DSCP See Differentiated Services Code Point

dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio wavesorthogonally polarized.

DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E

E-AGGR Ethernet-Aggregation

E-LAN See Ethernet LAN

E-Tree See Ethernet-Tree

EBS See Excess Burst Size

ECC See Embedded Control Channel

EF See Expedited Forwarding

EFM See Ethernet in the First mile

Electro MagneticInterference

Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades orlimits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-9

Page 198: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

electromagneticcompatibility

Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunicationsequipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagneticenvironment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentionalelectromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.[NTIA]

ElectroStatic Discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at differentelectrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.

Embedded ControlChannel

An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a datacommunications channel (DCC) as its physical layer.

EMC See electromagnetic compatibility

EMI See Electro Magnetic Interference

Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.

EPLn See Ethernet Private LAN

equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate forthe changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.

ERPS See ethernet ring protection switching

ES-IS End System to Intermediate System

ESD See ElectroStatic Discharge

ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf orcabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.

ETH-CC Ethernet Continuity Check

ETH-LB Ethernet Loopback

ETH-LT Ethernet Link Trace

Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/CollisionDetection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..

Ethernet in the Firstmile

Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes theadvantages of the SHDSL.bis technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFMprovides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. Inaddition, it meets the users' requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)and Video On Demand (VOD).

Ethernet LAN Ethernet LAN. A L2VPN service type that is provided for the user Ethernet in differentdomains over the PSN network. For the user Ethernet, the entire PSN network serves asa Layer 2 switch.

Ethernet Private LAN Both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared betweendifferent customers.

ethernet ringprotection switching

protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.

Ethernet VirtualPrivate LAN

A service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.

Ethernet-Tree etherenet tree. An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint EthernetVirtual Connection.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 199: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute

ETSI 300mm cabinet A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standardsof the ETSI.

EuropeanTelecommunicationsStandards Institute

A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLn See Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

Excess Burst Size excess burst size. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic controlis realized by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to definethe capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when theinformation is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must belarger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximumlength of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. Theprotection switching is not really performed.

Expedited Forwarding Expedited Forwarding (EF) is the highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHBis suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broadbandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or fasterthan the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110".

A.3 F-J

F

Failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required functionto be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now beendetected.

Fast Ethernet A type of Ethernet with a maximum transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. It complies withthe IEEE 802.3u standard and extends the traditional media-sharing Ethernet standard.

fast link pulse The likn pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FD See frequency diversity

FDI See Forward Defect Indication

FE See Fast Ethernet

FEC See Forward Error Correction

FFD Fast Failure Detection

Fiber Connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couplethe optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. Aconnector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source(or a detector).

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-11

Page 200: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and forconnections between subracks or inside a subrack.

Field ProgrammableGate Array

A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as thePAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but alsoovercomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of thelimited number of gate arraies.

FIFO See First in First out

File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computerson the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be anFTP client and the other an FTP server.

First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.

FLP See fast link pulse

Forced switch This function forces the service to switch from the working channel to the protectionchannel, with the service not to be restored automatically. This switch occurs regardlessof the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boardsare satisfying a higher priority bridge request.

Forward DefectIndication

Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of theLSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of thedefect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affectedhigher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.

Forward ErrorCorrection

A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload atthe transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated duringtransmission are corrected at the receive end.

Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and canbe used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.

FPGA See Field Programmable Gate Array

Fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.

Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network mediumthat can not support the original size of the packet.

frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame lengthis represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-specified by the sending and receiving parties.

frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certainfrequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is thenperformed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

FTP See File Transfer Protocol

Full duplex The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link.Onthe communication link, both parties can send and receive data at the same time.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 201: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

G

gateway networkelement

A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer andthe NM application layer

GCP See GMPLS control plan

GE See Gigabit Ethernet

Generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This isto adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream routerto avoid packet discarding and congestion.

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

Gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.Itruns at 1000Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not supportcoaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. IfGigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causingthe length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.

Global PositioningSystem

A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, andtiming services to worldwide users .

GMPLS control plan The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei.The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, thetraditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product seriessupport the ASON features.

GNE See gateway network element

GPS See Global Positioning System

GR See Graceful Restart

Graceful Restart In IETF, protocols related to Internet Protocol/Multiprotocol Label Switching (IP/MPLS) such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF), Intermediate System-IntermediateSystem (IS-IS), Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), Label Distribution Protocol (LDP),and Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) are extended to ensure that the forwardingis not interrupted when the system is restarted. This reduces the flapping of the protocolsat the control plane when the system performs the active/standby switchover. This seriesof standards is called Graceful Restart.

Graphical UserInterface

A visual computer enviroment that represents programs, files, and options with graphicalimages, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.

ground resistance (electricity) Opposition of the earth to the flow of current through it; its value dependson the nature and moisture content of the soil, on the material, composition, and natureof connections to the earth, and on the electrolytic action present.

GTS See Generic traffic shaping

GUI See Graphical User Interface

guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-13

Page 202: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

H

H-QoS Hierarchical Quality of Service

HA See High Availability

half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in bothdirections, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a partybegins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, beforereplying.

HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code 3

HDLC See High level Data Link Control procedure

High Availability The ability of a system to continuously perform its functions during a long period, whichmay exceeds the suggested working time of the independent components. You can obtainthe high availability (HA) by using the error tolerance method. Based on learning casesone by one, you must also clearly understand the limitations of the system that requiresan HA ability and the degree to which the ability can reach.

High level Data LinkControl procedure

A data link protocol from ISO for point-to-point communications over serial links.Derived from IBM's SDLC protocol, HDLC has been the basis for numerous protocolsincluding X.25, ISDN, T1, SS7, GSM, CDPD, PPP and others. Various subsets of HDLChave been developed under the name of Link Access Procedure (LAP).

High Speed DownlinkPacket Access

A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirementfor asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables themaximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing theWCDMA network topology.

Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by thetunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.

Hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop representsa small step on the route from one main computer to another.

hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables andstorage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. Whenthe faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services inthe faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entiresystem.

HP Higher Order Path

HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HSM Hitless Switch Mode

HTB High Tributary Bus

hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supportsthe AM function.

I

ICMP See Internet Control Messages Protocol

IDU See indoor unit

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 203: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF The Internet Engineering Task Force

IF See intermediate frequency

IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol

IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol managesand controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet GroupManagement Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

IMA See Inverse Multiplexing over ATM

indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connectunit.

Institute of Electricaland ElectronicsEngineers

A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States butboasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.

Interface board area The area for the interface boards on the subrack.

intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RFsignal.

Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generateroutes.

Intermediate System toIntermediate System

A protocol used by network devices (routers) .IS-IS is a kind of Interior Gateway Protocol(IGP), used within the ASs. It is a link status protocol using Shortest Path First (SPF)algorithm to calculate the route.

Internal Spanning Tree Internal spanning tree. A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a specialMSTI whose ID is 0.

InternationalElectrotechnicalCommission

The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.

InternationalOrganization forStandardization

ISO (International Organization for Standardization) is the world's largest developer andpublisher of International Standards.

Internet ControlMessages Protocol

ICMP belongs to the TCP/IP protocol suite. It is used to send error and control messagesduring the transmission of IP-type data packets.

Internet GroupManagement Protocol

The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups amongthe TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establishand maintain multicast group memberships.

Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sentacross an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet deliveryservice. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. Theentire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the twofundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-15

Page 204: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Internet ProtocolVersion 6

A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specificationsand standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering TaskForce (IETF).Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) is also called. It is a new version of theInternet Protocol, designed as the successor to IPv4. The specifications andstandardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task Force(IETF).The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits whilean IPv6 address has 128 bits.

Inverse Multiplexingover ATM

Inverse Multiplexing over ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involvesinverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among linksgrouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum ofthe link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group.

IP See Internet Protocol

IPv6 See Internet Protocol Version 6

IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ISO See International Organization for Standardization

IST See Internal Spanning Tree

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector

IVL Independence VLAN learning

J

Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control systeminstability.

A.4 K-O

L

L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network

Label Switched Path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through labelswitching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based onnormal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.

Label Switching Router The Label Switching Router (LSR) is the basic element of MPLS network. All LSRssupport the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit andforwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route,creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latterforwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table.

LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAG See link aggregation group

LAN See Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on the D channel

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 205: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laserlight has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductorlaser as the light source.

layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmitsand distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is thesecond layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.

Layer 2 virtual privatenetwork

A virtual private network realized in the packet switched (IP/MPLS) network by Layer2 switching technologies.

LB See Loopback

LCAS See Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LDPC Low-Density Parity Check code

line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

Link AggregationControl Protocol

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of an IEEE specification (802.3ad)that allows you to bundle several physical ports to form a single logical channel. LACPallows a switch to negotiate an automatic bundle by sending LACP packets to the peer.

link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a linkaggregation group so that a MAC clientcan treat the link aggregation group as if it werea single link.

Link CapacityAdjustment Scheme

The Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) is designed to allow the dynamicprovisioning of bandwidth, using VCAT, to meet customer requirements.

Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link isa downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,the link protection should be provided.

LMSP Linear Multiplex Section Protection

Local Area Network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few squarekilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANsare generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from beingswitched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has beenswitched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel tothe working channel.

LOF See Loss Of Frame

LOM Loss Of Multiframe

Loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that thesignal or message can be analyzed for errors.

LOP See Loss Of Pointer

LOS See Loss Of Signal

Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overheadindicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitorthe performance of the PHY layer.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-17

Page 206: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Loss Of Pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in thePHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start ofcell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.

Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the receivedsignal.

Lower subrack The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

LP Lower Order Path

LPT Link State Path Through

LSP See Label Switched Path

LSR See Label Switching Router

M

MA See Maintenance Association

MAC See Medium Access Control

MAC See Media Access Control

MADM Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer

MaintenanceAssociation

That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, theconnectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of MaintenanceEntities.

Maintenanceassociation End Point

A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a ServiceInstance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is anend point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate MaintenanceEntity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.

Maintenance Domain The Maintenance Domain (MD) refers to the network or the part of the network for whichconnectivity is managed by CFM. The devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.

Maintenance Point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.

ManagementInformation Base

A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. Itcomprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such asrouters and switches) in a network.

Manual switching A protection switching. When the protection path is normal and there is no request of ahigher level switching, the service is manually switched from the working path to theprotection path, to test whether the network still has the protection capability.

Maximum TransferUnit

The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) is the size of the largest datagram that can besent over a network.

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MCF See Message Communication Function

MD See Maintenance Domain

MDI See Medium Dependent Interface

Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 207: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of thedata link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connectingthe physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocolchecks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain controlinformation is added to the data, and then the data and the control information aretransmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MACprotocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmittedcorrectly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the controlinformation is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.

Medium AccessControl

A general reference to the low-level hardware protocols used to access a particularnetwork. The term MAC address is often used as a synonym for physical addresses.

Medium DependentInterface

The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the mediatransmission.

MEP See Maintenance association End Point

MessageCommunicationFunction

The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of managementinformation with their prs .

MIB See Management Information Base

MIP Maintenance Intermediate Point

MLPPP See Multi-link Point to Point Protocol

mount angle An L-shape steel sheet. One side is fixed on the front panel with screws, and the otherside is fixed on the installation hole with screws. On both sides of a rack, there is an L-shaped metal fastener. This ensures that internal components are closely connected withthe rack. Normally, an internal component is installed with two mount angles.

MP See Maintenance Point

MPID Maintenance Point Identification

MPLS See Multi-Protocol Label Switch

MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network.Inthis case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs ofdifferent media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.

MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of faultdetection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM andrelevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.

MPLS TE Multiprotocol Label Switching Traffic Engineering

MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported throughmultiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a groupof LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has twoidentifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquelydefine the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE orFILTER_SPEC object.

MS See Multiplex Section

MSP See multiplex section protection

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-19

Page 208: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

MSTI See Multiple Spanning Tree Instance

MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MTBF Mean Time Between Failure

MTTR See Mean Time To Repair

MTU See Maximum Transfer Unit

Multi-link Point toPoint Protocol

A protocol used in ISDN connections. MLPPP lets two B channels act as a single line,doubling connection rates to 128Kbps.

Multi-Protocol LabelSwitch

A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different linklayers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis ofIP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability ofnetworks, and is beneficial to routing.

Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. Thedestination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP addressranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicastgroup rather than a host.

Multiple SpanningTree Instance

Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTPwithin an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology forframes classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MSTConfiguration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.

Multiple SpanningTree Protocol

Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using analgorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmedas a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoidedin the loop network.The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs andmultiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwardedin a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.

Multiple SpanningTree Region

The MST region consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links amongthem. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MSTregion attributes belong to the same MST region. The attributes for the same MST regionare as follows: Same region name Same revision level Same mapping relation betweenthe VLAN ID to MSTI

Multiplex Section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.

multiplex sectionprotection

A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between andincluding two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a"protection" channel.

N

N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protectionchannel.

NE See Network Element

NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the U2000, which is used to manage the OptiXequipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE,boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 209: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Network Element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. OneNE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors theentire network element. The NE software runs on the system control board.

network managementsystem

The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, andmaintenance of a network.

Network Service AccessPoint

A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer canaccess OSI network services.

Network to NetworkInterface

This is an internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.

next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a networkon its journey to its final destination.

NLP Normal Link Pulse

NMS See network management system

NNHOP Next-Next-Hop

NNI See Network to Network Interface

Node A node stands for a managed device in the network.For a device with a single frame, onenode stands for one device.For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for oneframe of the device.Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.

Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able toprotect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able toprotect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to thePLR.

non-gateway networkelement

A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must betransferred by the gateway network element application layer.

non-GNE See non-gateway network element

NSAP See Network Service Access Point

NSF Not Stop Forwarding

NSMI Network Serial Multiplexed Interface

O

OAM See Operation, Administration and Maintenanc

ODF See Optical Distribution Frame

ODU See outdoor unit

One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protectedtunnel at a PLR.

Open Shortest PathFirst

A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra'salgorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. Alink state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routersin the area.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-21

Page 210: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Open SystemsInterconnection

A standard or "reference model" (officially defined by the International Organization ofStandards (ISO)) for how messages should be transmitted between any two points in atelecommunication network. The reference model defines seven layers of functions thattake place at each end of a communication.

Operation,Administration andMaintenanc

Operation, Administration and Maintenance. A group of network support functions thatmonitor and sustain segment operation, activities that are concerned with, but not limitedto, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faultsand keep a segment in an operational state and support activities required to provide theservices of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.

Optical DistributionFrame

A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.

orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers ormaintenance engineers of different stations.

OSI See Open Systems Interconnection

OSP OptiX Software Platform

OSPF See Open Shortest Path First

outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequencyconversion and amplification for RF signals.

Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at an port to an output port withoutchanging the structure of the signals.

Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.

A.5 P-T

P

Packet over SDH/SONET

A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POSinterface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport ofpacket data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.

packet switchednetwork

A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.

Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.

Path/Channel A logical connection between the point at which a standard frame format for the signalat the given rate is assembled, and the point at which the standard frame format for thesignal is disassembled.

PBS See peak burst size

PCB See Printed Circuit Board

PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bitfor interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.

PDH See Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PE See Provider Edge

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 211: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burstIP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. Thisparameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be notless than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.

Peak Information Rate Peak Information Rate . A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should benot less than the committed information rate.

Penultimate HopPopping

Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLSenabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS taggedpacket is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to anadjacent Label Edge Router (LER).

Per-Hop-Behavior A forwarding behavior applied at a DS-compliant node. This behavior belongs to thebehavior aggregate defined in the DiffServ domain.

PHB See Per-Hop-Behavior

PHP See Penultimate Hop Popping

PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode

PIM-SM See Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode

PIR See Peak Information Rate

Plesiochronous DigitalHierarchy

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimumrate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.

Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulatesdata packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.

polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed orrotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave isperpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called verticallypolarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to theplane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if thetip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, thiselectromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

POS See Packet over SDH/SONET

Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which suppliespower for the subracks in the cabinet.

PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol

PPVPN Provider Provisioned VPN

PQ See Priority Queuing

PRBS Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence

PRC Primary Reference Clock

Printed Circuit Board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic componentsusing conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated ontoa non-conductive substrate.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-23

Page 212: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Priority Queuing A priority queue is an abstract data type in computer programming that supports thefollowing three operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with anassociated priority 2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highestpriority, and return it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3)PeekAtNext (optional): look at the element with highest priority without removing it

Processing board area An area for the processing boards on the subrack.

protection groundingcable

A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, onehalf of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.

Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.

Protocol IndependentMulticast-Sparse Mode

A protocol for efficiently routing to multicast groups that may span wide-area (and inter-domain) internets. This protocol is named protocol independent because it is notdependent on any particular unicast routing protocol for topology discovery, and sparse-mode because it is suitable for groups where a very low percentage of the nodes (andtheir routers) will subscribe to the multicast session. Unlike earlier dense-mode multicastrouting protocols such as DVMRP and PIM-DM which flooded packets everywhere andthen pruned off branches where there were no receivers, PIM-SM explicitly constructsa tree from each sender to the receivers in the multicast group. Multicast packets fromthe sender then follow this tree.

Provider Edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE isresponsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, andexchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, aPE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network andthe public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

Pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is establishedand maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW ismaintained by the two end PEs of a PW.

Pseudo WireEmulation Edge-to-Edge

Pseudo-Wire Emulation Edge to Edge (PWE3) is a type of end-to-end Layer 2transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a telecommunicationservice such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched Network (PSN). PWE3 alsoemulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) circuitand SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation.

PSN See packet switched network

PTN Packet Transport Network

PW See Pseudo wire

PWE3 See Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge

Q

QoS See Quality of Service

QPSK See Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

Quadrature Phase ShiftKeying

Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) is a modulation method of data transmissionthrough the conversion or modulation and the phase determination of the referencesignals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK usesfour dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On thesephases, each QPSK character can perform two-bit coding and display the codes in Graycode on graph with the minimum BER.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 213: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Quality of Service Quality of Service, which determines the satisfaction of a subscriber for a service. QoSis influenced by the following factors applicable to all services: service operability,service accessibility, service maintainability, and service integrity.

R

Radio Freqency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create anelectromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The ACwith frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classifiedinto such high-frequency current.

Radio NetworkController

A device used in the RNS to control the usage and integrity of radio resources.

Random EarlyDetection

A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet accordingto the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronizationresulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.

Rapid Spanning TreeProtocol

An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning treeconvergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible withthe STP protocol.

RDI See Remote Defect Indication

Received SignalStrength Indicator

The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in thereceiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDDwithin a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna

Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average receivedpower at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-10 BER.

RED See Random Early Detection

REI See Remote Error Indication

Remote DefectIndication

A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminaldetects specific defects in the incoming signal.

Remote ErrorIndication

A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There aretwo types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstreamLTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) issent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.

remote networkmonitoring

A manage information base (MIB) defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force(IETF). RMON is mainly used to monitor the data flow of one network segment or theentire network.

Resource ReservationProtocol

The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and isused to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transportlayer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network controlprotocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).

Reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit endtransmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit endto slow down the transmission rate.

RF See Radio Freqency

RFC Request For Comment

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-25

Page 214: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

RIP See Routing Information Protocol

RMON See remote network monitoring

RNC See Radio Network Controller

Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-levelalarms always accompany a root alarm.

route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.

Routing InformationProtocol

Routing Information Protocol: A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IPprotocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source anddestination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routinginformation to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.

routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routersregularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on thedestination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--inhops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.

RS Reed-Solomon encoding

RSL Received Signal Level

RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator

RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol

RTN Radio Transmission Node

S

SD See space diversity

SDH See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDP Serious Disturbance Period

SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function

Service LevelAgreement

A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between serviceprovider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information aboutmeasuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operatingand support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider andcustomer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved thedocumented target measure.

SES Severely Errored Second

Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicatesthe highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt theresources required by other backup tunnels.

SF See Signal Fail

SFP See Small Form-Factor Pluggable

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 215: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix thecabinet.

signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber signalcable.

Signal Fail SF is a signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defectcondition (not being the degraded defect) is active.

Signal Noise Ratio The SNR or S/N (Signal to Noise Ratio) of the amplitude of the desired signal to theamplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times thelogarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).

Simple NetworkManagement Protocol

A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modifythe management information of a network element. This protocol ensures thetransmission of management information between any two points. The pollingmechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, whichcan be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on thenetwork and report these activities to the network console workstation. Controlinformation about each device is maintained by a management information block.

simplex Of or relating to a telecommunications system in which only one message can be sentin either direction at one time.

SLA See Service Level Agreement

Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.

Small Form-FactorPluggable

A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.

SNC See SubNetwork Connection

SNCP See SubNetwork Connection Protection

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR See Signal Noise Ratio

SP Strict Priority

space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distanceto transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the twosignals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.

Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol. STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop.STP applies to the redundant network to block some undesirable redundant paths throughcertain algorithms and prune a loop network into a loop-free tree network.

SSM See Synchronization Status Message

Static Virtual Circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPNinformation by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.

Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can betransmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only toactive input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devicesto be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.

STM See synchronous transport module

STM-1 SDH Transport Module -1

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-27

Page 216: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

STM-1e STM-1 Electrical Interface

STM-1o STM-1 Optical Interface

STP See Spanning Tree Protocol

sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group ofnetwork management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected orcorrelated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clocksubnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, asub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions andclosely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on atopological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-networkplanning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view spacecan be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus onthe equipments under their management.

subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets aredestined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,server or router and is matched with the IP address.

SubNetworkConnection

A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by theassociation of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.

SubNetworkConnection Protection

A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection ifthe working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a requiredlevel.

SVC See Static Virtual Circuit

SVL Shared VLAN Learning

Switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. Thisbehavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.

Synchronization StatusMessage

A message that is used to transmit the quality levels of timing signals on the synchronoustiming link. Through this message, the node clocks of the SDH network and thesynchronization network can aquire upper stream clock information, and the two performoperations on the corresponding clocks, such as tracing, switchover, or converting hold),and then forward the synchronization information of this node to down stream.

Synchronous DigitalHierarchy

SDH is a transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It definesthe transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speedcounterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH issuitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity sinceit uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.

synchronous transportmodule

An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in theSDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fieldsorganized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125 . The information is suitablyconditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronizedto the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Highercapacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacitiesfor N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 217: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

T

tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such asTCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets aredropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.

Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded whenthe queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-widesynchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.

TCI Tag Control Information

TCP See TransmissionControl Protocol

TDM See Time Division Multiplexing

TE See traffic engineering

TEDB See Traffic Engineering DataBase

TelecommunicationManagement Network

The Telecommunications Management Network is a protocol model defined by ITU-Tfor managing open systems in a communications network.An architecture formanagement, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation andadministration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services.

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

Time DivisionMultiplexing

It is a multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into timeslots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3......), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engrosstime slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to betransmitted over one channel.

Time To Live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in thenetwork. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.

TMN See Telecommunication Management Network

ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.

TPS See Tributary Protection Switch

traffic engineering A task that effectively maps the service flows to the existing physical topology.

Traffic EngineeringDataBase

TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to knowthe features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which usesthe link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS containsome TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reservedbandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are ratherimportant. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area andgenerates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLSTE network.

Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guaranteethe performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of trafficin the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layerdevices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-29

Page 218: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of thetrail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferredsignals.

TransmissionControlProtocol

The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets tobe sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the completemessages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliablein the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer inthe ISO/OSI reference model.

Tributary ProtectionSwitch

Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended toprotect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.

trTCM See Two Rate Three Color Marker

TTL See Time To Live

TU Tributary Unit

Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnelensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnelis an MPLS tunnel.

Two Rate Three ColorMarker

The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, PeakInformation Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associatedburst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds thePIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds ordoesn't exceed the CIR.

A.6 U-Z

U

UAS Unavailable Second

UBR See Unspecified Bit Rate

UDP See User Datagram Protocol

underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.

UNI See User Network Interface

Unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.

Unspecified Bit Rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is idealfor the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.

Upper subrack The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.

UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply

upward cabling Cables or fibres connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 219: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

User DatagramProtocol

A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send adatagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IPto deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliableconnectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,delayed, or delivered out of order.UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet isreceived.

User Network Interface A type of ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for theinterface between ATM-based products (a router or an ATM switch) located in a privatenetwork and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used todescribe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.

V

V-NNI See virtual network-network interface

V-UNI See Virtual User-Network Interface

Variable Bit Rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike apermanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidthand is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.

VBR See Variable Bit Rate

VC See Virtual Channel

VC-12 Virtual Container -12

VC-3 Virtual Container -3

VC-4 Virtual Container -4

VCC Virtual Channel Connection

VCC,VPL See Virtual Chanel Connection

VCG See virtual concatenation group

VCI See Virtual Channel Identifier

Virtual ChanelConnection

Virtual Channel Connection. The VC logical trail that carries data between two endpoints in an ATM network. A logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connectionsinto one virtual connection.

Virtual Channel Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in theATM network uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual channelidentifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted by the sw

Virtual ChannelIdentifier

virtual channel identifier. A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, togetherwith the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a seriesof ATM switches on its way to its destination.

virtual concatenationgroup

A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the samevirtual concatenation link

Virtual Leased Line A point-to-point, layer-2 channel that behaves like a leased line by transparentlytransporting different protocols with a guaranteed throughput.

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-31

Page 220: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Virtual Local AreaNetwork

A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physicalnetwork segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associatedwith switched Ethernet.

virtual network-network interface

A virtual network-network interface (V-NNI) is a network-side interface.

Virtual Path Identifier The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to whichVP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.

Virtual Private LANService

A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLSenables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through theMAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.

Virtual PrivateNetwork

The extension of a private network that encompasses encapsulated, encrypted, andauthenticated links across shared or public networks. VPN connections can provideremote access and routed connections to private networks over the Internet.

Virtual Private WireService

A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.

Virtual Routing andForwarding

A technology included in IP (Internet Protocol) network routers that allows multipleinstances of a routing table to exist in a router and work simultaneously.

Virtual Switch Instance An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to thevirtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridgefunction and can terminate PW.

Virtual User-NetworkInterface

virtual user-network interface. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action pointto perform service claissification and traffic control in HQoS.

VLAN See Virtual Local Area Network

VLL See Virtual Leased Line

Voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voiceinformation over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital formin discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of thepublic switched telephone network (PSTN).

VoIP See Voice over IP

VPI See Virtual Path Identifier

VPLS See Virtual Private LAN Service

VPN See Virtual Private Network

VPWS See Virtual Private Wire Service

VRF See Virtual Routing and Forwarding

VSI See Virtual Switch Instance

W

Wait to Restore Time A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault recovered - trail/connection canbe used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal trafficsignal from.

WAN See Wide Area Network

A GlossaryOptiX RTN 620

Commissioning Guide

A-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-05-30)

Page 221: RTN 620 Commissioning Guide(V100R005C00_03)

Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NEmanagement layer of the transport network

Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) is a fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidthallocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of aninterface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. Inthis manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.

Weighted RandomEarly Detection

A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCPsynchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-prioritypacket when calculating the packet loss ratio.

WFQ See Weighted Fair Queuing

Wide Area Network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which arephysically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as aprovince, a state or even a country.

Winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.

wire speed Wire speed refers to the maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value ofwire speed equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.

WMS Wholesale Managed Services

WRED See Weighted Random Early Detection

WRR Weighted Round Robin

WTR See Wait to Restore Time

X

XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination

XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation

OptiX RTN 620Commissioning Guide A Glossary

Issue 03 (2010-05-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-33